Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

INTEGRATED PROGRAMME
(CLASS IX)
2023-2024

PHYSICS

Brilliant
STUDY CENTRE
PALA
Mutholy Campus, Ph: 04822 - 206100, 206800
Arunapuram Campus, Ph: 04822 - 212415, 210949, 216975
Ernakulam - Ph: 0484 - 2665080, 2665090

www.brilliantpala.org., email: [email protected]

1
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Blank

2
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

CONTENTS

1. Vector ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 05

2. Motion ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 24

3. Projectile Motion ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 55

4. Force and Laws of Motion ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78

5. Work Energy Power..........................................................................................115

6. Gravitation.........................................................................................................148

7. Fluids..................................................................................................................171

8. Wave motion and sound...................................................................................190

3
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

blank

4
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

CHAPTER - 1
VECTORS

Scalar Quantities or Scalars

The physical quantities which have only magnitude but no direction, are called scalar quantities or scalars.
Mass, length, time, distance covered, speed, temperature, work etc, are a few examples of scalars.
The scalars can be added, subtracted, multiplied and divided by ordinary laws of algebra.
Vector quantities or vectors
The physical quantities which have magnitude as well as direction are called vector quantities or vectors.
Displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, torque, gravitational intensity etc. are a few examples of vectors.
Vectors cannot be added, subtracted, multplied and divided by ordinary laws of algebra.
A vector in writing, can be represented either by a single letter in bold face or by a single letter with an arrow
head on it.
N

W E A B
5 cm

Geometrically or graphically, a vector is represented by a straight line with an arrow head i.e, arrowed line.
Here the length of the arrowed line represents the magnitude and the arrow head represents the direction of the given
vector.
Vectors in a plane (or in two dimensions)
Consider the motion of an object in the X-Y plane with origin at O. Let at time t, the object be at point A. If we
draw an arrow with its tail at point O and head at point A, as shown in Fig., then OA is called position vector of the

object at point A and is generally represented by r .
Y
Displacement
Position A Vector
Vector
r
r r  r B
Position
Vector
X
O
Let at time t' the object reach at point B as shown in the Fig. Then OB is the position vector of the object in
time t'.
5
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Here AB , where tail or initial position is at A and head or tip at B is called the displacement vector of the object
in time interval (t' – t)
Hence displacement vector is that vector which tells how much and in which direction an object has changed its
position in a given interval of time.
A few definitions in vector algebra
(i) Unit vector. A unit vector of the given vector is a vector of unit magnitude and has the same direction as that of
the given vector.

A unit vector of A is written as  and is read as ‘A cap’ or ‘A hat’. Since magnitude of A is A, hence

 A Vector
A  A  or   
A modulus of the vector
Thus a unit vector in a given direction is also defined as a vector in that direction divided by the magnitude of the
given vector . It is a unitless and dimensionless vector and represents direction only
In cartesian coordinates, î , ˆj, k̂ are the unit vectors along X- axis, Y-axis and Z- axis respectively..
(ii) Equal vectors Two vectors are said to be equal if they have equal magnitude and same direction.

If two vectors A and B are represented by two equal parallel lines drawn with same scale, having arrow
heads in the same direction, (Fig.) then A and B are equal vectors i.e., A  B .
(iii) Negative Vector. A negative vector of a given vector is a vector of same magnitude but acting in a direction
opposite to that of the given vector.

The negative vector of A is represented as  A .

(iv) Co-initial vectors.

The vectors are said to be co-initial, if their initial point is common. In Fig., two vectors A and B have been
drawn from the common initial point O. Therefore, A and B are called co-initial vectors.
Q
B

O P
A
(v) Collinear vectors. These are those vectors which are having equal or unequal magnitudes and are acting
along the same straight line, or along the parallel lines in same direction or along parallel lines in opposite
direction.

6
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

A A
A B

B B

(a) (b) (c)

(vi) Coplanar Vectors. These are those vectors which are acting in the same plane. The three vectors A, B and C
are acting in the plane of the paper, hence they are coplanar vectors.

A B

C
Multiplication of a vector by a real number

 
The multiplication of a vector A by a real number n becomes another vector nA . Its magnitude becomes n
times the magnitude of the given vector.
A A

2A 2A
(a) (b)
Its direction is the same or opposite as that of A , according as n is a positive or negative real number. Thus

n (A)  n A and  n A  n A
Multiplication of a vector by a scalar

When a vector A is multiplied by a scalar S, it becomes a vector SA , whose magnitude is S times the
magnitude of A and it acts along the direction of A . The unit of SA is different from the unit of vector A .
Resultant vector
The resultant vector of two or more vectors is defined as that single vector which produces the same effect as
is produced by individual vectors together. The nature of the resultant vector is the same as that of the given vectors.
Addition of vectors
Consider a particle which is first displaced through 4m due east and then 3m due north. Let these displacements
be represented by PQ and QS respectively on some suitable scale. The final displacement of the particle is found

by drawing a straight line from the starting point P to the end point S. The magnitude of PS is equal to
 4 2  32  5 m and angle  which gives the direction of displacement of PS . It is neither towards east nor
towards north but is due north of east. This shows that the vectors cannot be added by simple laws of algebra.

7
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

S N

R 3m W E

P  S
4m Q

The displacement PS is the sum (or resultant) of displacement PQ and QS i.e., PQ  QS  PS

PQ, QS and PS are represented by A, B and R respectively, then A  B  R

Here R is called resultant of two vectors A and B

Rules of geometric addition of vectos
(i) For the addition of two vectors, represent these two vectors by arrowed lines using the same suitable scale.
Displace the second vector such that its tail coincides with the head of the first vector. Then the single vector
drawn from the tail of first vector to the head of the second vector represents their resultant vector.
(ii) For the addition of three or more vectors, represent these vectors by arrowed lines using the same suitable
scale. Displace these vectors such that the head of first vector coincides with the tail of second vector and
whose head coincides with the tail of third vector and so on, then the single vector drawn from the tail of the first
vector to head of last vector represents their resultant vector.
(a) When the two vectors are acting in the same direction.

Let the two vectors A and B be acting in the same direction as shown in the Fig.
A A B

B R  AB

(a) (b)

To find their resultant, coincide the tail of B on the head of A as shown . Then the single vector R drawn from
the tail of A to the head of B gives their resultant vector R  A B

R AB
(b) When two vectors are acting in opposite directions
A A
B
B R= A- B

(a) (b)

Let the two vectors A and B be acting in opposite directions as shown in the Fig. To find their resultant,
coincide the tail of B on the head of A .Then the single vector R drawn from the tail of A to the head of B give their
resultant vector i.e.

8
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

(c) When two vectors act at some angle.

Let the two vectors A and B be acting at some angle to each other as shown in the Fig.. To find their resultant
R , coincide the tail of A on the head of B as shown . Then the single vector R drawn from the tail of A to the
head of B gives the resultant vector..

Q S A Q
B
R
B B
R
O P O
A A P
(a) (b) (c)

Triangle law of vectors

It states that if two vectors acting on a particle at the same time are represented in magnitude and direction by
the two sides of a triangle taken in one order, their resultant vector is represented in magnitude and direction by the
third side of the triangle taken in the opposite order.
Parallelogram law of vectors
It states that if two vectors acting on a particle at the same time are represented in magnitude and direction by
the two sides of a parallelogram drawn from a point, their resultant vector is represented in magnitude and direction
by the diagonal of the parallelogram drawn from the same point.
(d) When number of vectors act in different directions.

Let the number of vectors A, B, C and D etc. be acting in different directions as shown in the Fig..

To find their resultant vector, coincide the tail of B with the head of A , tail of C with the head of B and tail of D with
the head of C . Then the single vector drawn from the tail of A to head of D will represent their resultant vector..

S
D C
D
C
T ABC Q

B R AB B

A O P
A
(a) (b)

This method of finding the resultant is called polygon law of vectors.

Thus polygon law of vectors states that if a number of vectors, acting on a particle at the same time are
represented in magnitude and direction by various sides of an open polygon taken in the same order, their resultant
is represented in magnitude and direction by the closing side of the polygon taken in opposite order.

9
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Polygon law of vectors is an extension of the triangle law of vectors. According to polygon law of vectors.

A BC D  R
Magnitude of R

Let the two vectors A and B , inclined at an angle  be acting on a particle at the same time. Let them be
represented in magnitude and direction by two sides OP and PQ of triangle OPQ, taken in the same order, Then,

according to triangle law of vector addition, the resultant R is represented by the third side OQ of triangle, taken in
opposite order.
Draw QN perpendicular to OP produced. In Fig. OP = A ; PQ = B ; OQ = R and  NPQ  

R
B
 
O P N
A

PN
In QNP ,  cos 
PQ
or PN  PQ cos   B cos  -----------(1)
QN
and  sin 
PQ
or QN  PQ sin   B sin  ------------(2)
In right angled triangle ONQ, we have
OQ 2  ON 2  NQ 2
or OQ 2  OP  PN 2  NQ 2

or R 2  A  B cos  2  B sin  2


or R 2  A 2  2AB cos   B 2 cos 2   sin 2   or R 2  A 2  2AB cos   B 2
i.e., R  A 2  B 2  2AB cos  ------------(3)

Direction of R

Let the resultant R make an angle  with the direction of A . Then from right angled triangle QNO.
QN QN B sin 
tan     ------(4)
ON OP  PN A  B cos 

10
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Parallelogram law of vector addition.

Let the two vectors A and B , inclined at angle  be acting on a particle at the same time.

S Q

B R

 

O A P N

Let they be represented in magnitude and direction by two adjoining sides OP and OS of the parallelogram
OPQS, drawn from a point O. According to parallelogram law of vectors, their resultant vector R will be represented
by the diagonal OQ of the parallelogram.

Magnitude and direction of R

Draw QN perpendicular to OP produced. In the above Fig.
OP = A, OS = PQ = B, OQ = R and  SOP   QPN   Proceeding as discussed above, in the case of
triangle law of vector addition, the magnitude and direction of resultant vector R will be given by

R  A 2  B 2  2AB cos  -----------(5)

B sin 
and tan  
A  B cos  ----------(6)
Condition for Zero Resultant Vector
If three vectors acting on a point object at the same time are represented in magnitude and direction by the
three sides of a triangle taken in the same order, their resultant is zero. Now the object is in equilibrium.
  
ABC  0
A B C
Then  
OP PQ QO
Q

C
B

O P
A
Consider three vectors A, B and C acting on an object at the same time. Let they be represented in magnitude
and direction by the various sides of a closed polygon taken in the same order, their resultant vector is zero.

11
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Subtraction of Vectors

Subtraction of a vector B from a vector A is defined as the addition of vector - B (negative of vector B ) to
vector A . Thus

 
A  BA   B

B A B
O P

A  B B
A S
(a) (b)

If  is the angle between A and B , then angle between A and  B is (180o-  ). Therefore

 
R  A 2  B2  2AB cos 180o   = A 2  B2  2AB cos  -----------(9)


B sin 180o    B sin 
and tan   
 
A  B cos 180   A  B cos 
o -----------(10)

RESOLUTION OF A VECTOR
It is the process of splitting a single vector into two or more vectors in different directions which together
produce the same effect as is produced by the single vector alone. The vectors into which the given single vector is
split are called component vectors. The resolution of a vector is just opposite to composition of vectors.

R
B

O P
A

Let a vector R be represented by OQ , Let A and B be represented by OP and PQ , so that,

OQ  OP  PQ , R  AB

Then A and B are the component vectors of R

12
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Rectangular Components of a Vector in Three Dimensions

Consider a vector A represented by OR . Let A x , A y , A z be the rectangular components of A along X, Y

and Z axes respectively. Let î , ˆj, k̂ be the unit vectors along X, Y and Z axes respectively. Then

A x = A x î , A y  A y ˆj and A z  A z k̂

Since A  A x  A y  A z

 A  A x î  A y ˆj  A z k̂ -----------(17)

From solid geometry A  A 2x  A 2y  A 2z ------(18)

If x, y, z be the magnitude of the position vector r along X,Y and Z axes then
r  xî  yĵ  zk̂ ---------(19)

and r  x 2  y 2  z 2 ----------(20)
PRODUCT OF TWO VECTORS
The Product of two vectors can be of two types
(A) Scalar product or dot product of two vectors .
The scalar or dot product of two vectors A and B represented by A . B (read as A dot B ) is a scalar, which

is equal to the product of the magnitudes of A and B and the cosine of the smaller angle between them. If  is the
smaller angle between A and B , then

A . B  AB cos  -------------(21)
Scalar product or dot product of two vectors is also defined as the product of the magnitude of one vector with
the magnitude of the component of other vector in the direction of first vector.
Special Cases
(i) When two vectors are parallel, then  = 0o, cos 0o = 1.

 A.B  AB 1  AB

For unit vectors, î . î  ˆj.ˆj  k̂ .k̂  1

13
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(ii) When two vectors are perpendicular, then

  90 o , cos 90 o  0
 
 A.B  AB0   0
It means the dot product of two perpendicular vector is zero. For unit vectors

î . ˆj  0  ˆj . k̂  k̂ . î
(iii) When two vectors are anti-parallel, then

 180o , cos180o   1  A . B  AB 1   AB

Examples of scalar or dot product of two vectors.

1. Work done W is defined as the dot product of force vector F and the displacement vector S i.e., W  F.S

2. The instantaneous power is defined as the dot product of force vector F and the instantaneous velocity v i.e.
P  F.v
Dot product in cartesian coordinates

 
Let A  A x î  A y ˆj  A z k̂ and B  B x î  B y ˆj  B z k̂ Then A.B  A x î  A y ˆj  A z k̂  B x î  B y ˆj  B z k̂ 
       
= A x î  B x i  B y ĵ  Bz k̂ + A y ĵ  B x î  B y ĵ  Bz k̂ + A z k̂  B x î  B y ĵ  B z k̂ 
       
= A x B x î . î  A x B y î . ĵ  A x B z î. k̂  A y B x ĵ. î

         
 A y B y ĵ. ĵ  A y B z ĵ. k̂  A z B x k̂. î  A z B y k̂. ĵ  A z B Z k̂.k̂

= A x B x 1  A x B y 0   A x B z 0   A y B x 0   A y B y 1  A y B z 0   A z B x 0   A z B y 0   A z B z 1

= A x B x  A y B y  A z Bz -------(22)

(B) Vector or cross product of two vectors

The vector or cross product of two vectors A and B is represented as A B (read A cross B ) is a vector,,
whose magnitude is equal to the product of the magnitudes of the two vectors and sine of the smaller angle between
them. If  is the smaller angle between A and B .

A  B  C  AB sin  Ĉ ---------------(23)

Where Ĉ is a unit vector in the direction of C . The direction of C or Ĉ . (i.e., vector product of two vectors)
is perpendicular to the plane containing A and B and points in the direction as given by

(i) Right handed screw rule or (ii) Right hand Thumb Rule.
14
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

(i) Right handed screw rule : It states that if a right handed screw placed with its axis perpendicular to the plane
containing the two vectors is rotated from A to B through smaller angle, then the sense of the advance of the tip

of the screw gives the direction of A B or C .If the two vectors A and B are acting in the plane of the paper

as shown, then the direction of cross product A B , according to Right handed screw rule will be perpendicular
to the plane of paper directed outwards.

C  AB C  AB C  AB

A  B
A B A B
 

(ii) Right Hand Thumb Rule : It states that if we curl the fingers of right hand, keeping the thumb erect, in such a way
so that they point in the direction of rotation of A to B through smaller angle, then the thumb points the direction

of A B or C .
Special cases :

(i) When vectors are parallel or antiparallel,   0o or 180o and sin   0

 A  B  AB0 Ĉ  0

For unit vectors î  ĵ  k̂; ˆj  k̂  î; k̂  î  ĵ

and ˆj  î  k̂; k̂  ˆj   î; î  k̂   ˆj

Cross product in Cartesian Coordinates

î ĵ k̂
Let A  A x î  A y ĵ  A z k̂ and B  Bx î  B y ĵ  Bz k̂ Then A  B  A x Ay A z ----------(24)
Bx By Bz
 
ie., A  B  ˆi  A y Bz  A z B y   ˆj  A x B z  A z Bz   kˆ  A x B y  A y B x 
     
Example 1 : If A  B  C and the magnitudes of A, B and C are 5, 4 and 3 units respectively. What is the angle
 
between A and B ?

15
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Solution :

 | A | 5
|C|  3

| B | 4
  
Since 52 = 42 + 32, it is obvious that angle opposite to | A | is of 90o is angle between B and C is 90o.

3 1 3
 cos   or   cos
5 5
    
Example 2 : If A  B  C and A + B = C. What is the angle between A and B ?
 
Solution : Let the angle between A and B   .
  
or  A  B   A 2  B2  2AB cos 
2
C AB  C 2  A 2  B2  2ABcos  ;

A 2  B2  2AB  A 2  B2  2AB cos  ; or 2AB  2ABcos  ; cos   1 0

Example 3 : Two forces 10 N and 14 N are acting upon a body. What can be the maximum and minimum resultant
force on the body?
   
Solution : Let A  10 N and B  14 N . For maximum resultant, the angle between A and B is zero and for
 
minimum resultant, the angle between A and B is 180o.

 Fmax  A 2  B2  2AB cos   A 2  B2  2AB  A  B  10  14  24 N

 A  B
2
Fmin  A 2  B2  2AB cos180  A 2  B2  2AB   AB

= 14 – 10 = 4 N, acting along the direction of B   14 N  .
Example 4 : A particle has the following displacements in succession (i) 12 m towards east (ii) 5 m towards north
and (iii) 6 m vertically. Find the magnitude of the resultant displacement.
Solution : The three displacement are 12 m towards east, 5 m towards north and 6 m vertically upwards.
The resultant displacement is s  122  52  62  144  25  36  205  14.32N
Example 5 : The resultant of two equal forces acting at rt. angles to each other is 1414 N. Find the magnitude of
each force.
Solution : Let the two equal vectors be A when they act at 90o, the resultant is 2 A  1414 N

1414 1414
 A   1000 N
2 1.414

16
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

VECTORS
LEVEL I [HOMEWORK]
1. Indicate the stranger in the group.
A) Pressure B) Acceleration C) Momentum D) Impulse
2. Point out the odd member out
A) Torque B) Speed C) Temperature D) Electric current
3. The dot product of two vectors is equal to zero when they are inclined to each other at an angle of
A) 180o B) 90o C) 45o D) zero
4. The cross product of two vectors gives zero when the vectors enclose an angle of
A) 90o B) 180o C) 45o D) 120o

5. If n̂ is the unit vector in the direction of A , then n̂ is equal to

 A A
A) A  A B) n × A C) D) 
A A
6. The magnitude of a vector cannot be
A) Positive B) Zero C) Negative D) Unity
7. Which of the following is not a vector?
A) Angular momentum B) Angular impulse C) Kinetic energy D) Magnetic intensity
8. Which group indicate scalar quantities only?
A) Force and work B) Impulse and moment of inertia
C) Surface energy and torque D) Speed and energy
9. Which group indicates vector quantities only?
A) Speed and Density B) Temperature and Velocity
C) Potential and Intensity D) Surface Tension and Momentum
10. If the sum of non-coplanar vectors is zero, then their minimum number should be
A) Two B) Three C) Four D) Six
11. The unit vector of a velocity is
A) Acceleration × time B) Speed C) Displacement / time D) Unitless quantity
12. A unit vector denotes
A) A unit B) A dimension C) A direction D) None of these
13. The resultant of two equal forces is double of either of the forces. The angle between them is
A) 120o B) 90o C) 60o D) 0o
14. The cross product of a vector with itself is
A) A unit vector B) A null vector C) Axial vector D) Polar vector
 
15. If vectors A and B are perpendicular to each other, then which of the following statements is true?
  AB       
A) A  B  B) A  B  0 C) A.B  0 D) A.B  AB
2
17
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

16. A vector may change if

A) frame of reference is translated B) vector is rotated
C) frame of reference is rotated D) vector is translated parallel to itself
17. Two forces of magnitude 7 N and 5 N act on a particle at an angle  to each other,  can have any value the
minimum magnitude of resultant force is
A) 2 N B) 5 N C) 8 N D) 12 N
 
18. The magnitude of scalar product of the vectors A  2 ˆi  5 kˆ and B  3iˆ  4 kˆ is
A) 20 B) 22 C) 26 D) 29
 
19. If a  3 units due east and b  4 units due 60o north of west, the magnitude of the resultant is

A) 12 units B) 5 units C) 13 units D) 7 units

   
20. If a  3 units due south and b  4 units due 30o North of East. Magnitude of a  b is  
A) 5 units B) 12 units C) 6 units D) 37 units
21. Can the resultant of two vectors 8 units and 4 units be equal to
(a) 2 units, (b) 4 units, (c) 10 units, (d) 12 units, (e) 16 units
A) a, b, c B) a, d, e C) b, c, d D) c, d
22. A particle in the x-y plane is located at a distance 5 m from the origin at an angle of 37o with x-axis. The
position vector is
A) 4iˆ  3jˆ B) 4iˆ  3jˆ C) 3iˆ  4jˆ D) 3iˆ  4ˆj
   
23. A  ˆi  2ˆj  kˆ and B  ˆi  ˆj  2kˆ . The angle between A and B is
A) 60o B) 30o C) 45o D) 90o
 
24.    
A force F  2iˆ  3jˆ  4kˆ N displaces a body from position vector r1  2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ m to the position

 
vector r2  ˆi  ˆj  kˆ , the work done is

A) 8 J B) –8 J C) 16 J D) –16 J
       
25. If a  b  c  0, | a |  3, | b |  5 and | c |  7 , the angle between a and b is
A) 30o B) 45o C) 60o D) 90o

LEVEL II
1. Two vectors of magnitudes 10 and 15 units can never have a resultant equal to
A) 15 units B) 3 units C) 10 units D) 20 units
2. The minimum number of numerically equal vectors which can sum upto zero is
A) 2 B) 3 C) 4 D) 6
18
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

     
3. The vectors A and B are such that A  B  C and A 2  B2  C2 . Angle  between positive directions of A

and B is

 2
A) B) 0 C)  D)
2 3
4. Following forces start acting on a particle at rest at the origin of the co-ordinate system simultaneously
   
F1  5 ˆi  5 ˆj  5 kˆ , F2  2 ˆi  8 ˆj  6 kˆ , F3  6 ˆi  4 ˆj  7 kˆ , F4   ˆi  3 ˆj  2 kˆ . The particle will move
A) in x - y plane B) in y - z plane C) in x - z plane D) along x-axis
5. Maximum and minimum magnitudes of the resultant of the two vectors of magnitudes P and Q are in the ratio
3 : 1. Which of the following relations is True?
A) P = O B) P = 2Q C) PQ = 1 D) PQ = 2
6. The magnitude of a given vector whose end points are at (4, –4) and (–2, –2) must be
A) 2 10 B) 4 2 C) 5 10 D) 6 3
7. The minimum number of unequal coplanar vectors of which the sum can be zero is
A) Two B) Three C) Four D) Six
8. For what angle between the two vectors, their resultant is maximum?
A) 180o B) zero C) 90o D) 45o
9. For what angle between the two vectors is their resultant minimum?
A) 2 radian B)  radian C) zero D)  / 2 radian
10. The sum and difference of two vectors will be equal in magnitude if angle between vectors is
A) 30o B) 60o C) 90o D) 120o
    
11. If A  B  R and A + B = R, then angle between A and B is

A) 0o B) 60o C) 120o D)180o

12. The resultant of which of the following sets of vectors cannot be zero?
A) 2, 3 and 4 B) 1, 2 and 3 C) 2, 3 and 5 D) 1, 2 and 4
13. Out of the following pairs of forces, the resultant of which pair can never be 10 N?
A) 10 N and 12 N B) 50 N and 40 N
C) 5 N and 20 N D) 25 N and 15 N
 
14. The area of a parallelogram whose adjacent sides are P  2 ˆi  3jˆ and Q  ˆi  4ˆj is

A) 5 square units B) 15 square units C) 20 square units D) 25 square units

15. A force is inclined at 60o to the horizontal. If its rectangular component in the horizontal direction is 50 N, then
magnitude of the force in the vertical direction is
A) 25 N B) 75 N C) 87 N D) 100 N

19
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE
    
16. The resultant of A and B is perpendicular to A . What is the angle between A and B ?

1 A 1  A 1 A 1  A
A) cos   B) cos    C) sin   D) sin   
B  B B  B
 
17. The sum of two vectors A and B is at right angles to their difference. Then
A) A = B B) A = 2 B
 
C) B = 2A D) A and B have the same direction

18. The angle between  A  B  and  B  A  is

 
A)  B) zero C) D)
4 2
   
19. If A. B  0 then | A  B | is

A) Zero B) AB C) A2B2 D) AB

20. The angle between two vectors 2 ˆi  3 ˆj  kˆ and ˆi  2 ˆj  4 kˆ is

A) 0o B) 90o C) 180o D) None
21. If the magnitudes of scalar and vector products of two vectors are 6 and 6 3 respectively, then the angle
between two vectors is
A) 15o B) 30o C) 60o D) 75o
       
22. If a  b  c and | a |  | b |  | c | , the angle between a and b is
A) 0o B) 45o C) 60o D) 120o

23.      
The magntitude of the resultant of the forces 2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ , 3iˆ  ˆj  5kˆ and aiˆ  8jˆ  kˆ is 15. The value
of a is
A) 3 B) 4 C) 5 D) 1
   
24. If | a |  2, | b |  5 and | a  b |  8 , then a . b is
A) 6 B) 0.6 C) 10 D) 1
LEVEL III
     
1.  
If two non-parallel vectors a and b are equal in magnitude, then the vectors a  b and a  b will be:  
A) parallel to each other B) perpendicular to each other
C) anti-parallel to each other D) inclined at an angle less than 90o
2. The rectangular components of force of 5 dyne are:
A) 1 and 2 dyne B) 2 and 3 dyne C) 3 and 4 dyne D) 2.5 and 2.5 dyne
3. To get a resultant displacement of 10 m, two displacement vectors, one of magnitude 6 m and another of 8 m,
should be combined:
A) Parallel B) Anti-parallel C) At an angle 60o D) Perpendicular to each

20
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

4. The resultant of two forces acting at an angle of 150o is 10 kg wt, and is perpendicular to the smaller force.
The smaller force is:

A) 10 3 kg wt B) 20 3 kg wt C) 20 kg wt  
D) 20 / 3 kg wt

5. Five equal forces of 10 N each are applied at one point and all are lying in one plane. If the angles between
them are equal, the resultant of these forces will be:

A) Zero B) 10 N C) 20 N D) 10 2 N

6. An aeroplane is moving in a circular path with a speed 250 km/hr; what is the change in velocity in half
revolution?
A) 500 km/hr B) 250 km/hr C) 125 km/hr D) Zero
7. A truck travelling due north at 50 km/hr turns west and travels at the same speed. What is the change in
velocity?

A) 50 km/hr north-west B) 50 2 km/hr north-west

C) 50 km/hr south-east D) 50 2 km/hr south-west

8. I started walking down a road to day-break facing the sun. After walking for some time, I turned to my left,
then I turned to the right one once again. In which direction was I going then?
A) East B) North-west C) North-east D) South

9. A person moves 30 m north, then 20 m east, then 30 2 m south-west. His displacement from the original
position is:
A) 14 m south-west B) 28 m south C) 10 m west D) 15 m east
10. The resultant of two forces, one double the other in magnitude, is perpendicular to the smaller of the two
forces. The angle between the two forces is:
A) 120o B) 60o C) 90o D) 150o
 
11. If the vectors A  3iˆ  2ˆj  xkˆ and B  2iˆ  4ˆj  kˆ are perpendicular to each other, then the value of x is:

A) 2 B) 3 C) –2 D) –3
 
12. If A  2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ and B  3iˆ  ˆj  2kˆ , then the cosine of the angle  between two vectors is:

11 5 1 1
A) B) C) D)
14 14 14 7

13. A Force F  6iˆ  8jˆ  10kˆ newton produces an acceleration of 1 m/s2 in a body. The mass of body would be:

A) 200 kg B) 20 kg C) 10 2 kg D) 6 2 kg

21
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

14.    
A particle is displaced from position 2iˆ  ˆj  kˆ to another position 3iˆ  2ˆj  2kˆ under the action of the

 
force of 2iˆ  ˆj  kˆ . The work done by the force in an arbitrary unit is:
A) 8 B) 10 C) 12 D) 16
15. A quantity m is a scalar where as A is a vector. Then, the meaningful quantity is
A) m + A B) mA but no A/m C) A/m but not mA D) mA as well as A/m
16. a, b and c are three vectors having magnitudes 8, 3 and 5 as shown in the figure. Then
a
b

A) a = b + c B) a > b + c C) a < b + c D) none of these

17. Two vectors of equal magnitude are inclined to each other at an angle  . Keeping the direction of one of them
fixed the other is rotated through an equal angle  . Now, the resultant of these vectors has the same magnitude
as each of the two vectors. Then the value of  is

A) 90o B) 30o C) 45o D) 60o

More than one correct.
18. Two vectors 12 N and 5 N are acting at a point.
A) They can produce a resultant 17 N B) They can produce a resultant 6 N
C) They can produce a resultant 7 N D) They can produce a resultant 18 N

19. The vector sum of three vectors A, B and C is zero. If A  ˆi and B  ˆj , then

A) C should be along i B) C should be along j

C) C should be in the plane of ˆi and ˆj 

D) C should be in the direction of  ˆi  ˆj 
Passage Comprehension.
 
Consider the vectors A  2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ and B  ˆi  2ˆj  3kˆ
 
20. A  B is
A) 11iˆ  7ˆj  kˆ B) 11iˆ  7 ˆj  kˆ C) 11iˆ  7ˆj  kˆ D) 7iˆ  11jˆ  kˆ
   
21. Angle between A  B and A  B is

 
A) 0 B) C) D) 
3 2

22
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Matrix Match type.

22. Match the following.

Column I Column II
A) Dot product p) Vector
B) Unit vector q) Triangle law of vector addition
C) Cross product r) Scalar
D) Resultant s) Magnitude 1

A) A - s; B - r; C - p; D - q B) A - r; B - s; C - q; D - p
C) A - q; B - p; C - r; D - s D) A - r; B - s; C - p; D - q
Integer Answer Type.

23. The resultant of A  3i  2 j  xk and B  3i  2 j  4k is zero. The value of x is:

24. A particle is displaced from position (2i – j + k) to another position (3i + 2k) under the action of a force
 2i  j  k  . The work done by the force in arbitrary unit is
Reasoning Type.
Each question contains Statement I and Statement II. Of these Statements, mark correct choice if
A) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
B) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
25. Statement I : A physical quantity can be called as a vector if its magnitudes is zero.
Statement II : A vector has both magnitudes and direction.
   
26. Statement I : A  3iˆ  4ˆj and B  7iˆ  24ˆj , the vector having the same magnitude as B and parallel to A
is 15 ˆi  20ˆj .

Statement II : A vector is the product of magnitude of vector and unit vector of the given vector.

23
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 2
MOTION

Introduction
Motion is a very preliminary state of action associated with living and non-living beings. A moving bus, a
running boy etc. show motion while a rock lying on the road does not show motion and we say it is at rest. Change
in weather, day and night, sunset and sunrise, all are consequences of motion of earth. But without mentioning the
observer there is no point in mentioning the terms motion or rest.
When a tree is observed by an observer sitting on a bench, the tree is at rest. This is because position of the
tree is not changing with respect to the observer. Now when the same tree is observed by an observer sitting in a
super fast train, then the tree is moving with respect to the observer because the position of the tree is changing with
respect to the observer.
MECHANICS
The branch of Physics which deals with the study of the conditions under which objects around us move or at
rest is called Mechanics.
Mechanics can be broadly classified into the following branches:-
(i) Statics. It is a branch of mechanics which deals with the study of objects at rest under the action of forces.
(ii) Kinematics. It is that branch of mechanics which deals with the study of motion of objects without taking into
account the factors which cause motion. The term Kinematics is derived from a Greek word ‘Kinema’
meaning motion.
(iii) Dynamics. It is that branch of mechanics which deals with the study of motion of objects taking into account
the factors which cause motion.
Objects in Rest and Motion
Rest. An object is said to be at rest if it does not change its position with time, with respect to its surroundings. A
book lying on a table, a person sitting in a chair are the examples of rest.
Motion. An object is said to be in motion if it changes its position with time, with respect to its surroundings. A bird
flying in air, a train moving on rails, a ship sailing on water, a man walking on road are some of the examples of
motion. For illustration, a person sitting in a moving train is at rest with respect to his fellow passengers but is in
motion with respect to the objects outside the train.
Concept of Point Mass Object
When an object in motion covers a very large distance as compared to its size or dimensions, the object can
be regarded as a point object.

24
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Motion in One, Two and Three dimensions

(i) One dimensional motion. The motion of an object is said to be one dimensional motion if only one out of
three coordinates specifying the position of the object changes with respect to time.
In such a motion, the object moves along a straight line.
Example: Motion of a train along a straight railway track, an object dropped from a certain height above the
ground, an ant moving in a stretched wire.
(ii) Two dimensional motion. The motion of an object is said to be two dimensional if two out of the three co-
ordinates specifying the position of the object change with respect to time. In such a motion, the object moves
in a plane.
Example: An insect crawling over the floor, earth revolving around the sun etc. belong to this type of motion.
(iii) Three dimensional motion. The motion of an object is said to be three dimensional motion if all the three
coordinates specifying the position of the object change with respect to time. In such a motion the object
moves in a space.
Example: A kite flying on a windy day, random motion of gas molecules, a flying aeroplane or bird etc. belong
to this type of motion.
Types of Motion
(i) Linear motion (or translatory motion):
The straight line motion is called linear motion.
Example: The motion of car moving on straight road, a running person on a straight path, a stone being
dropped, motion of a train on a straight track.
(ii) Rotational motion:
Motion of a body around a fixed axis is called rotational motion.
Example: The motion of the leaves of an electric fan, motion of earth about its own axis.
(iii) Oscillatory motion:
The to and fro periodic motion of a body about a fixed point is called oscillatory motion.
Example: The motion of a simple pendulum, the motion of a body suspended from a spring.
Distance and Displacement
(a) Distance:
It is the actual length of the path covered by a moving particle. It is a scalar quantity. Its S.I. unit is metre (m)
(b) Displacement:
It is the shortest distance between the initial and final position of the particle. It is a vector quantity. Its S.I unit
is metre (m).
Example: Consider a body moving from a point A to a point B along the path shown in figure. Then the total
length of path covered is called distance (path -1). While the length of straight line AB in the direction from A
to B is called displacement (path -2).
path-1

A B
path-2

Note: If a body travels in such a way that it comes back to its starting position, then the displacement is zero.
However, distance travelled is never zero in case of a moving body.
25
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Some Important Points:

(i) When an object moves towards right from the origin, its displacement is considered as positive
(ii) When an object moves towards left from the origin, its displacement is considered as negative
(iii) When an object remains stationary or it moves first towards right and then an equal distance towards left, its
displacement is zero.
(iv) Shifting origin causes no change in displacement.

(v) If a body moves along the circumference of a circle of radius r, then the distance travelled by it is 2  r and
displacement is zero, for one complete revolution.
Illustration
A body starts from A and moves according to the given figure. (body retraces the path on reaching C then
reaches D)

D A 4m B 6m C

5m

The distance and displacement are as follows for different path.

Path Distance Displacement

AB 4m 4m
ABC 10 m 10 m
ABCB 16 m 4m
ABCA 20 m 0m
ABCAD 25 m -5 m

(c) Distinction between distance and displacement:

Distance Displacement
1 It is defined as the actual path traversed It is the shortest distance between two
by a body points which the body moves
2 It is a scalar quantity It is a vector quantity
3 It can never be negative or zero It can be negative, zero or positive.
4 Distance can be equal to or greater than Displacement can be equal to or less than
magnitude of displacement distance
5 Distance travelled is not a unique path Displacement is a unique path between
between two points two points
6 The distance between two points gives Displacement between two points does
full information of the type of path not give full information of the type of
followed by the body path followed by the body
7 Distance never decreases with time, for Displacement can decrease with time for
a moving body it is never zero a moving body and it can be zero
8 Distance in SI is measured in metre Displacement in SI is measured in metre.

26
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Example 1 : A man travels a distance 8 m towards north, then turns left and moves towards west 6 m. What is the
total distance and displacement from the starting point of his journey?
Solution : Distance = 8 + 6 = 14 m.
Displacement  82  62  10 m
Example 2 : A person moves in a circular path centered at O. He starts from A and reaches diametrically opposite
point B. Then find:
(i) distance travelled between A and B
(ii) displacement between A and B

Solution : N
r=1m E
W
B 0 A
S

(i) Distance = Length of actual circular path from A to B = half the circumference
2r
ie. Dis tan ce   r
2
as r = 1m
 Dis tan ce   m
(ii) Displacement = 2r along west
= 2m along west
Example 3 : An athlete completes a round of a circular track of diameter 200 m in 20 s. Calculate (i) the distance
travelled by the athlete (ii) the magnitude of the displacement of the athlete at the end of 1 minute and 10 seconds.
Solution : Here, diameter of the track, D = 200 m
Therefore length of circular track = circumference of the circular track
22
 2r    2r   D   200  628.57 m
7
(i) Distance travelled in 20 s = length of circular track = 628.57 m.
628.57
Distance travelled in 1s  m
20
628.57
Distance travelled in 1 minute and 10 s (or 70s)  m  70  2199.99  2200 m
20
(ii) Number of rounds completed in 20 s = 1
1 1
Number of rounds completed in 70 s =  70  3
20 2
When athlete completes 3 rounds his displacement is zero.
1
The position of the athlete in next round is just opposite to his starting point.
2
So displacement of athlete at the end of 1 minute and 10 s = diameter of the circular track = 200 m.
27
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 4: A person moves along the boundary of a square park of side 10 m in 40 s. What will be the magnitude
of displacement of the person at the end of 2 minutes.
Solution: The person takes 40 s to travel 40 m along the boundary once. In 2 minutes (120 s), the person travels
along the boundary and completes three times and reaches the initial point.
 The displacement is zero.
Uniform and Non-uniform Motion
(a) Uniform Motion:
A body has a uniform motion if it travels equal distances in equal intervals of time, however small these intervals
may be.

Y
A
n
io
ot
m
Distance

rm
ifo
Un

O X
Time
(b) Non-Uniform Motion :
A body has a non-uniform motion if it travels unequal distances in equal intervals of time. For example, if we
drop a ball from the roof of a building, we will find that it covers unequal distances in equal intervals of time. It
covers:
4.9 metre in the 1st second,
14.7 metre in the 2nd second,
29.4 metre in the 3rd second, and so on

Y
n

A
io
ot
m
rm
ifo
Distance

un
n-
No

O X
Time

The distance -time graph for a body having non-uniform motion is a curved line (as shown in the figure). Thus,
in order to find out whether a body has uniform motion or non-uniform , we should draw the distance time graph for
it. If the distance-time graph is a straight line, with uniform slope the motion will be uniform and if the distance -time
graph is a curved line, the motion will be non-uniform. It should be noted that non-uniform motion is also called
accelerated motion.
Speed
The distance travelled by a body in unit time is called its speed. Therefore,
Distance d
Speed = or s ---------- (1)
Time t
S.I unit of speed or average speed is m/sec. It is a scalar quantity.

28
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Types of Speed
(a) Average speed:
For an object moving with variable speed, average speed is the total distance travelled by the object divided
by the total time taken to cover that distance.
total distance travelled
Average Speed = total time taken ---------- (2)

(i) Let initial speed of an object is v1, final speed is v2 and acceleration is constant, then
v1  v 2
average speed = ---------- (3)
2
(ii) A body covers a distance s1 in time t1, s2 in time t2 and s3 in time t3
s1  s 2  s3
Then, average speed , v av  t  t  t ---------- (4)
1 2 3

(iii) A body travels with speed v1 for a time t1, v2 for time t2 and v3 for the time t3.
v1t1  v 2 t 2  v3 t 3
Then, average speed , v av  t1  t 2  t 3 ---------- (5)

 s1  v1t1 , s 2  v 2 t 2 , s3 = v3 t3
if t1 = t2 = t3 = t
t  v1  v 2  v3   v1  v2  v3 
vav = vav  ---------- (6)
3t 3
th th th
1 1 1
(iv) If a body covers time with speed v1 and the next time with speed v2 etc... and the last time
n n n
with speed vn,
v1  v2  .......  v n
then v av  ---------- (7)
n
(v) A body covers a distance s1 with speed v1 , s2 with speed v2 and s3 with speed v3

Then, average speed , vav 

 s1  s 2  s3 
s1 s 2 s3
 
s s s v1 v 2 v3
 t1  1 , t 2  2 , t 3  3
v1 v2 v3
(vi) A boy goes from home to school with speed v1 and come back to home with speed v2.
Here distance covered by the boy is same.
s
Time taken by the boy, from home to school, t1 = v and time taken by the boy, from school to home,
1
s
t2 = v
2

29
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

ss 2s 2v1v 2
Then, average speed, v av   v av 
t1  t 2 s s v1  v 2 ---------- (8)

v1 v 2
1 1 1
(vii) If an object covers rd distance with speed v1, next rd with speed v2 and last rd distance with
3 3 3
3v1v 2 v3
speed v3 then, v av  v v  v v  v v
1 2 2 3 3 1

th th th
1 1 1
(viii) If an object covers distance with speed v1, next
distance with speed v2 ........ and the last
n n n
n 1 1 1
distance with speed vn, then, v  v  v  ........  v
av 1 2 n

n
v av  ---------- (9)
1 1 1
  ........ 
v1 v 2 vn
Example 5 : A car is moving along X-axis as shown in figure. It moves from O to P in 18 s and returns from P to Q
in 6 seconds. What is the average velocity and average speed of the car in going from (i) O to P and (ii) from O to
P and back to Q.
40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 [Metre]
O
Q P
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 [Sec]

Displacement 360 m
Solution : (i) Average Velocity = time interval = = 20 ms-1
18

Path length 360m 1

Average speed = time interval  18  20 ms

(ii) From O to P and back to Q

OQ 240m
Average Velocity =   10ms 1
18  6 24
path length OP PQ 360  120
Average speed = time interval     20 ms 1
18 6 24
Example 6: A car covers 1st half of the distance between two places at a speed of 40 km h–1 and the 2nd half with
60 km h–1. What is the average speed of the car?
2v1v 2 2  40  60
Solution : From eqn. (8) v av  v  v   48 km/hr
1 2 40  60
Example 7 : On a 200 km track, a train travels the first 50 km at a uniform speed of 40 km/hr. How fast the train
must travel the next 150 km, so as to maintain the average speed of 60 km/h for the whole journey.

30
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

4 1 3 v 2  3v1 4v1v 2
Solution : v  v  v  v v  v avg 
v 2  3v1
ag 1 2 1 2

4v1v 2  v avg v 2  3v avg v1 ; 4v1v 2  v avg v 2  3v avg v1 ; v 2  4v1  v avg   3v avg v1

3v avg v1 3  60  40 7200
v2     72 km/h
4v1  vavg 4  40  60 100
(b) Uniform Speed (or constant speed)
When an object covers equal distance in equal intervals of time however small these intervals may be, it is said
to move with uniform speed.
Example: A car moves 10 m in every one second, so its motion is uniform
(c) Variable speed (Non-uniform speed)
If a body covers unequal distances in equal intervals of time, its motion is said to be non- uniform.
Example: Falling of an apple from a tree, a cyclist moving on rough rod, an athlete running a race, vehicle
starting from rest.
(d) Instantaneous speed. When the speed of an object is variable, then the object possesses, different speeds
at different instants. The speed of an object at a given instant of time is called its instantaneous speed.
Let at an instant t, an object while moving covers a distance s in a small interval of time t so that t  0 ,
then.
s ds
Instantaneous speed  Lt  ---------- (10)
t 0 t dt

ds
Where is the first derivative of distance with respect to time. In case of a uniform motion of an object, the
dt
instantaneous speed is equal to its uniform speed.
Velocity
Velocity of an object is defined as the time rate of change of displacement of the object. It is also defined as the
speed of an object in a given direction. Quantitatively,
Displacement
Velocity =
Time interval

Velocity is a vector quantity, as it has both, the magnitude (speed) and direction. The velocity of an object can
be positive, zero or negative according as its displacement is positive, zero or negative.
The unit of velocity is cm s-1 in C.G.S. system and ms-1 in M.K.S. System or S.I.
(a) Uniform velocity. An object is said to be moving with a uniform velocity, if it undergoes equal displacements in
equal intervals of time, however small these intervals may be.

31
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Distinction between Speed and Velocity:

Speed Velocity
1 It is the rate of change of position of an It is the rate of change of position of an
object. object in a specific direction.
2 distance travelled displacement
Speed = Velocity =
time time
3 It is a scalar quantity It is a vector quantity
4 Speed will always be positive It will be positive or negative depending
on the direction of motion
5 For moving body, it will never be zero It may be zero

More about speed and velocity:

(i) The instantaneous velocity in magnitude is equal to instantaneous speed.
(ii) A particle may have constant speed but variable velocity. In uniform circular motion speed remains constant
while velocity changes because of change in direction of motion.
(iii) If a particle is moving along a straight line without changing the direction, its average velocity will be equal
to its average speed. Otherwise average velocity will be less than average speed

average velocity
1
averagespeed

Displacement - Time Graph in Uniform Motion

Position-time graph of an object in a uniform motion in one dimension is a straight line AB, inclined to time axis
as shown in Fig. Here the position co-ordinates of the object at the instants t = O, t1 and t2 respectively are x0, x1 and
x2. Let C and D be the two points on the position-time graph corresponding to instants t1 and t2. Draw CC1, CC2,
DD1 and DD2, perpendicular on time axis and position axis, as shown in Fig.

Displacement Displacement
B
D
x2 D2
C A E
C2 C 
x1 E
A
x0
C1 D1
O t1 t2 B O D Time
Time

Then t 2  t1  OD1  OC1  C1D1  CE

and x 2  x1  OD 2  OC2  C2 D 2  ED
x 2  x1 ED
 velocity of the object, v    tan   slope of position-time graph.
t 2  t1 CE

32
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Thus velocity of an object in a uniform motion is equal to the slope of position-time graph with time axis. Hence
the importance of the position-time graph of uniform motion lies in the fact that its slope gives us velocity of the
object.
Displacement - time graph (examples)

(1) x

x0

Body is at rest at x0.

x
(2)


t

Body starts from origin and is moving with velocity v  tan  away from origin.

x
(3)

Body starts from rest from origin and moves away from the origin with increasing velocity and positive
acceleration.
Features of uniform motion
(i) The velocity of uniform motion does not depend on the choice of origin.
(ii) The velocity in uniform motion does not depend on the choice of the time interval.
(iii) For uniform motion along a straight line in the same direction., the magnitude of the displacement is equal to
the actual distance covered.
(iv) The velocity is positive if the object is moving towards the right of the origin and negative if the object is moving
towards the left of the origin .
(v) For an object in uniform motion no force is required to maintain its motion.
(vi) In uniform motion, the instantaneous velocity is equal to average velocity at all time because velocity remains
constant at each instant, at each point of the path.
Nonuniform motion
An object is said to be in nonuniform motion if it undergoes equal displacement in unequal intervals of time.
(i) Variable velocity.
An object is said to be moving with a variable velocity, if either its speed or its direction of motion or both
change with time.
33
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(ii) Average velocity.

The average velocity of an object is equal to the ratio of the total displacement, to the total time interval for
which the motion takes place i.e.,

Total displacement
Average velocity =
Total time taken

(iii) Instantaneous velocity.

The velocity of an object at a given instant of time or at a given point during motion is called its instantaneous
velocity.
Thus Instantaneous velocity of an object is that limiting value of the average velocity of the object in a small
interval of time around that instant, which tends to zero.
Uniformly Accelerated Motion
Accelerated Motion
In non-uniform motion of an object, the velocity of the object is different at different instants i.e., the velocity
of the object keeps on changing with time. Such a motion is said to be an accelerated motion.
Acceleration
Acceleration of an object is defined as the time rate of change of velocity of the object. It may also be defined
as the change in velocity in unit time. Mathematically,

change in velocity
acceleration = time taken

Acceleration is a vector quantity. It is positive if the velocity is increasing and is negative if the velocity is
decreasing. The negative acceleration is also called retardation or deceleration..
The unit of acceleration is ms-2 in M. K. S. system or S. I. and cms-2 in C. G. S. system.
(a) Uniform acceleration. An object is said to be moving with a uniform acceleration if its velocity changes by
equal amounts in equal intervals of time however small these intervels may be.
(b) Variable acceleration. An object is said to be moving with a variable acceleration if its velocity changes by
unequal amounts in equal intervals of time.
(c) Average acceleration. When an object is moving with a variable acceleration, then the average acceleration
of the object for the given motion is defined as the ratio of the total change in velocity of the object during
motion to the total time taken.

total change in velocity

Average acceleration = total time taken

(d) Instantaneous acceleration. When an object is moving with variable acceleration, then the object possesses
different acceleration at different instants. The acceleration of the object at a given instant of time or at a given
point of motion, is called its instantaneous acceleration.
Thus, instantaneous acceleration of an object is also equal to the second time derivative of the position of the
object at the given instant.
34
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Equation for uniformly accelerated motion along a straight line

Consider an object, moving with a uniform acceleration ‘a’ along a straight line OX, with origin at O. Let the
object reach at point A and B at instants t1 and t2. Let x1and x2 be the displacements of the object at times t1 and t2
respectively and v1 and v2 be the velocities of the object at positions A and B respectively.
(i) Velocity - time relation

Acceleration of the object = change in velocity

time taken

v1 A v2 B
O
x1 t2 X
x2

v 2  v1
a
t 2  t 1 ---------(12)

or v 2  v1  a t 2  t1 
or v 2  v1  a ( t 2  t1 ) --------(13)
Let the origin of time axis be taken at A and u be the velocity of the object at A. v be the velocity of the object at B
after time t. Then.
v1  u; t1  0; v 2  v and t 2  t
Putting these values in (13), we get
v  u  at -------(14)
The relations (13) and (14) are the required velocity - time relations.
Velocity - time graph for accelerated motion.

Velocity Velocity Velocity

on
ati
e ler city u Negative
cc elo Acceleration
i ve A ial V Positive
u sit nit u
Po ro I Acceleration
Ze

O O O
Time Time Time
(a) (b) (c)

(ii) Position - time relation

Let vav be the average velocity of the object during the motion of object from A to B,

Displacement x 2  x1
Then v av 
time taken

t 2  t1 or x 2  x1  v av t 2  t 1 

35
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Initial velocity  Final velocity v1  v 2

But v av  =
2 2

 v  v2 
x 2  x 1   1  t 2  t1  -------------(15)
 2 

 v1  v1  a t 2  t1  
or x 2  x1  
2  t 2  t1  ---------------(16) From eqn. (13)
 
t1 = 0. Let x1= x0, v1 = u, t2= t and x2 = x, in relation (16) we have

 u  u  a  t  0 
x  x0     t  0
 2 

1
x  x 0  u t  0   a t  0 
2

1
or x  x 0  ut  a t 2 --------(17)
2

1
or x  x 0  ut  at 2 --------(18)
2

Using x  x 0  S  distance travelled in time t, we have

1
S  ut  at 2 -------------(19)
2
The relations (16), (17) and (19) are the required position - time relations
(iii) Position -velocity relation
From (13), we have

t 2  t1   v 2  v1
a
Putting this value in (15) we get

v1  v 2  v 2  v1  v 22  v12
x 2  x1   
2  a  2a

or v 22  v12  2a x 2  x1  -------(20)
If u and v are the velocities of an object at positions x 0 and x respectively, then using
v 2  v, x1  x 0 and x 2  x in (20), we get

v 2  u 2  2a x  x 0  --------(21)

If x  x 0  S , Then
36
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

v 2  u 2  2aS ----------(22)
The relations (20), (21) and (22) are the required position - velocity relations.
(iv) Distance travelled in nth second of uniformly accelerated motion.
Let u = initial velocity of the object.
a = uniform acceleration of the object,
Sn , Sn 1 distances travelled by the object in n seconds and (n-1) seconds respectively,,
Dn = distance travelled in the nth second.
Then D n  Sn  Sn 1 ---------(23)

1 2
We know that the distance travelled in t seconds is given by S  ut  at
2

1 2
 Distance travelled in n seconds is Sn  un  an
2
Distance travelled in (n – 1) second is
1
Sn 1  u n  1  a n  1
2

2
Putting values in (23), we get

 1   1 2
D n  un  an 2   u (n  1)  a n  1 
 2   2 

1 1 a a  1
 un  a n 2  un  u  a n 2  an   u  an   u  a  n  
2 2 2 2  2

a
or Dn  u  2n  1 -------(24)
2
Velocity - Time Graph
The variation of velocity with time can be represented graphically to calculate acceleration exactly like we
calculated speed from distance-time graph.

Velocity in m/s 0 10 20 30 40 50
Time in seconds 0 2 4 6 8 10

37
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

50

velocity in m/s
40 B
30
20
A C
10

2 4 6 8 10
Time in seconds
Velocity-Time graph of uniformly accelerated motion
Consider an object moving with uniform acceleration ‘a’ along a straight line. Let u be initial velocity of
motion.
v1  OA 2 ; v 2  OB2 ; t1  OA1 and t2= OB1

Velocity
B2 B
v2

A2 A
v1 C

v
A1 B1
O t1 t2 Time

v 2  v1 OB 2  OA 2 A B CB
Acceleration a   2 2 
t 2  t1 OB1  OA1 A1B1 AC = slope of straight line AB.

Thus acceleration of an object in a uniformly accelerated motion in one dimension is equal to the slope of the
velocity - time graph with time axis.
Distance travelled in a given time interval

 v1  v 2 
Distance travelled = average velocity × time interval    x t 2  t1 
 2 

1
 A1A  B1B A1B1 = Area of Trapezium AA1 B1B.
2
Thus the distance travelled by an object in a given time interval is equal to the area under velocity - time graph
for the given interval of time.
Derivation of Equations of Motion - Graphical Method
(a) Velocity - Time Relation:
Consider the v-t graph shown for a body having velocity u at t = 0 and v at t seconds. The acceleration ‘a’
associated with the motion is given by,

38
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

QR v  u v  u
a  slope   
PR t  0 t
 v  u  at or v = u + at

v S Q

velocity

u P R
C
O t time
(b) Position - Time relation :
Area below the v-t graph is a measure of the displacement in straight line.
 Displacement s = Area (OACBD)
1 1 1
s  BC  OD   OA  OD  at  t  ut  v  u  at  ; s  ut  at 2
2 2 2

v S C

velocity

2
½ at
B
u ut D
O t time
(c) Position - Velocity relation :
Displacement in ‘t’ seconds is given by
1 1
s = Area of trapezium OACBD   OA  CD   OD   u  v   t
2 2

 vu  v u
2 2
1
s  u  v     v2  u 2  2as  v 2  u 2  2as
2  a  2a
Example 8 : Distance-time graph for two bodies A and B is given, which of the two bodies has greater speed?

39
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1
Solution : For A, slope = tan 30   speed
o

3
For B, slope = tan 45o = 1 = speed
Body B has greater speed because its slope is large.
Example 9 : Figure shows the velocity time graph of a particle moving along straight line (v is m/s and t is in
seconds). Its average velocity in 20 seconds will be:

Displacement
Solution : v av  ; Displacement = area of curve
time

1 1
10  5  10 10  10  5  25  100  25 30
vav  2 2  
20 20 4
Example 10: A particle starts with an initial velocity of 2.5 m/s along the positive X direction and it accelerates
uniformly at the rate of 0.5 m/s2.
(i) Find the distance travelled by it in the first two seconds.
(ii) How much time does it take to attain the velocity 7.5 m/s?
(iii) How much distance will it cover in attaining the velocity of 7.5 m/s?
Solution: u = 2.5 m/s; a = 0.5 m/s2
1 1
(i) s  ut  at 2 (t = 2)  2.5  2   0.5  4  5  1  6 m
2 2
(ii) t=? v = 7.5 m/s; v = u + at

v  u 7.5  2.5 5
t    10 s
a 0.5 0.5
(iii) v 2  u 2  2as

v 2  u 2 7.52  2.52 56.25  6.25

s    50 m
2a 2  0.5 1
Example 11: A particle moves with constant acceleration. If v1, v2 and v3 are the three average velocities in three
v1  v 2 t1  t 2
successive intervals t1, t2 and t3 of time, then prove that v  v  t  t
2 3 2 3

Solution : We know that, since the body is moving with uniform acceleration

40
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

v 2  v1 v3  v 2 v 2  v1 t1  t 2 v1  v 2 t1  t 2
a    ; ie, 
t1  t 2 t2  t3 v3  v 2 t 2  t 3 v 2  v3 t 2  t 3
Velocity - Time graph (examples)
1. v

O t
Body is always at rest.

2. v

v0

O t
Body is moving with constant velocity v0.
3. v

O t
Body is at rest initially then it starts moving with its velocity increasing at constant rate i.e., body is moving with
constant acceleration.
4. v

v0
O t

Body starts its motion with initial velocity v0 and continues to move with its velocity increasing at a constant
rate i.e., acceleration of the body is constant.
Acceleration - Time Graph
1. a

O t
Acceleration of the body is zero that means the body is moving with constant velocity.

41
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2. a

O t

Acceleration of the body is constant and positive.

a
3. +

O t

Acceleration of the body is constant and negative.

a
4.

O t

Initially the acceleration of the body is zero. Then its acceleration is increasing at a constant rate.
Equations of motion for freely falling objects
Since the freely falling bodies fall with uniformly accelerated motion, the three equations of motion derived
earlier for bodies under uniform acceleration can be applied to the motion of freely falling bodies. For freely falling
bodies, the acceleration due to gravity is ‘g’ so we replace the acceleration ‘a’ in the equations by ‘g’ and since the
vertical distance of the freely falling bodies is known as height ‘h’, we replace the distance ‘s’ in our equations by the
height ‘h’. This gives us the following modified equations for the motion of freely falling bodies.
General equations of motion: Equations of motion for freely falling bodies
(i) v = u + at changes to v = u + gt

1 2 1
(ii) s  ut  at changes to h  ut  gt 2
2 2

(iii) v 2  u 2  2as changes to v 2  u 2  2gh

We shall use these modified equations to solve numerical problems. Before we do that, we should remember
the following important points for the motion of freely falling bodies.
(i) When a body is dropped freely from a height, its initial velocity ‘u’ is zero.
(ii) When a body is thrown vertically upwards, its final velocity ‘v’ becomes zero, when it reaches the highest point.
(iii) The time taken by a body to rise to the highest point is equal to the time it takes to fall from the same height.

42
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

(iv) The distance travelled by a freely falling body is directly proportional to the square of time of fall.
To solve numerical problems
(i) If a body is dropped from a height then its initial velocity u = 0 but has acceleration (gravity).
(ii) If a body comes to rest, its final velocity v = 0 or, if a body reaches the highest point after being thrown
upwards its final velocity v = 0 but has acceleration (gravity).
(iii) Motion of a body is said to be free fall if the only force acting on it is gravity (i.e. earth’s attraction).
RELATIVE VELOCITY
When two objects A and B are moving with different velocities, then the velocity of one object A with respect
to another object B is called relative velocity of object A with respect to B. Hence relative velocity is defined as the
time rate of change of relative position of one object with respect to another.
Expression for relative velocity.
(i) When the two objects are moving along parallel straight lines in the same direction i.e., angle between
them is 00
Relative velocity of object A with respect to B is given by
  
v AB  v A  v B
Since v AB , vA and v B all are in the same direction, we can write

v AB  v A  v B ----------(25)
Thus if two objects are moving in the same direction, the magnitude of relative velocity of one object with
respect to another is equal to the difference in magnitude of two velocities.
(ii) When the two objects are moving along parallel straight lines in opposite directions i.e., angle between
them is 1800.
Relative velocity of object A with respect to object B is given by
  
v AB  v A  v B ----------(26)
Thus if two objects are moving in opposite directions, the magnitude of relative velocity of one object with
respect to the other is equal to the sum of the magnitudes of their velocities.

43
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

MOTION
LEVEL I [HOMEWORK]
1. A person covers half the distance with speed v1 and remaining half with speed v2. The average speed is given by

v1  v 2 2v1v 2 2 v1v 2
A) B) C) D)
2 v1  v 2 v1  v 2 v1  v 2
2. In a uniformly accelerated motion from rest a body travels a distance x in first two seconds and a distance y in
next two seconds. The relation between x and y is
A) y = 4x B) y = x C) y = 3x C) y = 2x
3. The acceleration of a body in motion can be known from slope of
A) Force-time graph B) Work-time graph
C) Displacement-time graph D) Velocity-time graph
4. A body moving with uniform acceleration 8 ms starts from rest. The distance covered by it in fifth second will
–2

be
A) 8 m B) 64 m C) 4 m D) 36 m
5. The distance covered under a journey is proportional to the square of time. The body under motion has
A) Uniform acceleration B) Variable acceleration C) No acceleration D) Uniform velocity
6. A velocity-time graph for a moving object is shown below. What would be the total displacement during time
t = 0 to t = 6 s? (2013)

5
v
m/s t(s)
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

–5

A) 10 m B) 20 m B) 2.5 m C) 0.0 m
7. A body of mass 2 kg is moving on a smooth floor in straight line with a uniform velocity of 10 m/s. Resultant
force acting on the body is : (2015)
A) 20 N B) 10 N C) 2 N D) zero
8. A stone is dropped from a certain height which can reach the ground in 5 seconds. It is stopped after three
seconds of its fall and then is again released. The total time taken by the stone to reach the ground will be :

 g  10 ms  2

A) 6.5 s B) 7.0 s C) 7.5 s D) 8.0 s

9. An object performs upward journey under gravity in time t. The downwards journey is performed in time
t
A) t B) t2 C) 2t D)
2
10. At a particular height, the velocity of an ascending body is u. The velocity at the same height while the body falls
under gravity is
u
A) u B) u2 C) 2u D)
2

44
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

11. Two different masses are dropped from the same height for downward journey under gravity. The larger mass
reaches the ground in time t. The smaller mass takes time

A) Equal to t B) Greater than t C) Less than t D) Equal to t

12. A car moving at a speed v is stopped in a certain distance when the brakes produce a deceleration a. If the speed
of the car was nv, what must be the deceleration of the car to stop it in the same distance and in the same time?

A) na B) na C) n2a D) n3a
13. A ball is thrown vertically downward with a velocity u from the top of a tower. It strikes the ground with a
velocity 3u. The time taken by the ball to reach the ground is given by

u 2u 3u 4u
A) g B) g C) g D) g

14. The ratio of displacement in n second and in the nth second for a particle moving in a straight line under constant
acceleration starting from rest is

2n  1 1 n2 n2
A) B) C) D)
n2 n n 1 2n  1
15. A ball is released from the top of a tower of height h meters. It takes T seconds to reach the ground. What is the
position of the ball at T/3 second?
A) h/9 meters from the ground B) 7h/9 meters from the ground
C) 8h/9 meters from the ground D) 17h/18 meters from the ground
16. A body freely falling from the rest has a velocity v after it falls through a height h. The distance it has to fall down
for its velocity to become double, is
A) 2h B) 4h C) 6h D) 8h
17. The displacement-time graph for two particles A and B are straight lines inclined at angles of 30o and 60o with
the time axis. The ratio of velocities of vA : vB is

A) 1 : 2 B) 1: 3 C) 3 :1 D) 1 : 3
18. If a car covers 2/5th of the total distance with v1 speed and 3/5th distance with v2, then average speed is

1 v1  v 2 2v1v 2 5v1v 2
A) v1v 2 B) C) v  v D) 3v  2v
2 2 1 2 1 2

19. Two balls A and B of same mass are thrown from the top of the building. A thrown upward with velocity v and
B, thrown down with velocity v, then
A) velocity of A is more than B at the ground
B) velocity of B is more than A at the ground
C) both A and B strike the ground with same velocity
D) none of these
20) A drunkard walking in a narrow lane takes 5 steps forward and 3 steps backward, followed again by 5 steps
forward and 3 steps backward, and so on. Each step is 1 m long and requires 1 s. The time when he will fall into
the pit 13 m away from him is:
A) 13 s B) 37 s C) 40 s D) 42 s

45
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

LEVEL II
1. A car runs at a constant speed on a circular track of radius 100 m, taking 62.8 seconds for every circular lap.
The average velocity and average speed for each circular lap respectively is:

A) 10 m/s, 0 B) 0, 0 C) 0, 10 m/s D) 10 m/s, 10 m/s

2. A cyclist goes around a circular track once in every 2 minutes. If the radius of the circular track is 105 metres,
22
what will be his speed ? (take   )
7

A) 2.3 m/s B) 3.5 m/s C) 4.5 m/s D) 5.5 m/s

3. A body with initial velocity 8 m/s moves along a straight line with constant acceleration and travels 640 m in 40s.
Find the average velocity during this interval.

A) 8 m/s B) 16 m/s C) 24 m/s D) 32 m/s

4. When the distance of an object travels is directly proportional to time, it is said to travel with

A) zero velocity B) constant speed C) constant acceleration D) uniform velocity

5. On a 120 km track, a train travels the first 30 km at a uniform speed of 30 km/h. How fast must the train travel
the next 90 km so as to average 60 km/h for the entire trip?

A) 120 km/h B) 90 km/h C) 30 km/h D) 60 km/h

6. A stone is dropped from a certain height and at the same time another stone is thrown horizontally from the same
height, which one will reach the ground earlier.

A) First stone B) Second stone C) Simultaneously D) Not sure

7. Starting from rest a car moves 200 m in 10 s. What is its acceleration in m/s2?

A) 4 B) 10 C) 20 D) 2000

8. The acceleration of car that comes to stop from a velocity of 10 m/s in distance of 25 m is

A) –2 m/s2 B) –4 m/s2 C) –8 m/s2 D) –16 m/s2

9. Can this speed-time graph be seen in nature?

A) Yes B) No C) Sometimes D) At a particular instance

46
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

10. What is the distance covered by the object?

Velocity (m/sec.)
20

10

1 2 3 4
Time (sec)
A) 45 m B) 55 m C) 60 m D) 65 m
11. With reference to the adjacent v-t graph, what is the displacement?

4
m/sec

5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 (sec)
–2
A) 18 m B) 16 m C) 8 m D) 6 m
12. This graph is the v-t graph of an object thrown upwards. What is the maximum height achieved by it?

A
30
20
Velocity (ms–1)

10
B
0
– 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 Time (s)

– 20
– 30 C

A) 30 m B) 45 m C) 60 m D) 90 m
13. A bullet of mass 10 g travelling horizontally with a velocity of 160 ms–1 strikes a stationary wooden block and
comes to rest in 0.02 s. The distance of penetration of the bullet into the block will be : (2014)
A) 1.20 m B) 1.60 m C) 2.00 m D) 2.40 m
14. The acceleration versus time graph of an object is as shown in figure. The corresponding velocity-time graph
of the object is: (2014)

v v v v
A) B) C) D)
t t t t

47
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

15. The figure given below shows the displacement plotted time for a particle. In which regions is the force acting
on the particle zero? (2014)
C E

Displacement
B

D
A
Time
A) AB B) BC C) CD D) DE
16. A ball hits a wall horizontally with a velocity of 6.0 ms–1. After hitting wall it rebounds horizontally with a
velocity of 4.4 ms–1. If the balls remains in the contact of all for 0.040 sec. the acceleration of ball would be
(2014)
A) –260 m/s2 B) +260 m/s2 C) –26 m/s2 D) +26 m/s2
17. A particle starts its motion from rest under the action of a constant force. If the distance covered in first 10s is
S1 and that covered in first 20 s is S2 then : (2015)
A) S2 = S1 B) S2 = 2S1 C) S2 = 3S1 D) S2 = 4 S1
18. Cars A and B are moving towards east with velocities 30 km h–1 and 20 km h–1 respectively. Velocity of car B
with respect to A is
A) 10 km h–1 towards east B) 10 km h–1 towards west
C) 50 km h–1 towards east D) 50 km h–1 towards west
19. If a person stands stationary on an escalator, it takes time t1 to take him from the ground floor to the first floor.
If the escalator is stationary and he walks up, it takes time t2. How much time would it take him if he walks up
the moving escalator?

1 t1 t 2
A)  t1  t 2  B)
2
 t1  t 2  C) t  t
1 2
D) t 2
1  t 22 

20. A stone is dropped from a certain height which can reach the ground in 5 s. It is dropped after 3 s of its fall and
then it again released. The total time taken by the stone to reach the ground will be
A) 6 s B) 6.5 s C) 7 s D) 7.5 s
LEVEL III
More than one correct answer type.

A particle moves along a straight line as s  u  t  2   a  t  2 

2
1.

A) The acceleration of the particle is ‘a’ B) The initial velocity of the particle is ‘u’
C) At t = 2s, the particle is at the origin D) The acceleration of the particle is ‘2a’
2. Which of these s-t graphs is (are) not physically possible?

A) B) C) D)

48
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Passage Comprehension
Passage I
A particle starts with an initial velocity 2.5 m/s along the positive x-direction and it accelerates uniformly at the
rate 0.50 m/s2.
3. What is the distance travelled by the particle in the first two seconds?
A) 5.0 m B) 4.0 m C) 6.0 m D) 9.0 m
4. How much time does the particle take to reach the velocity 7.5 m/s?
A) 10 s B) 0 s C) 6 s D) 9 s
5. How much distance will the particle cover in reaching the velocity 7.5 m/s?
A) 50 m B) 40 m C) 30 m D) 20 m
Passage II
If s is related to t, then according to the equation, s = ctn
Where c is a constant. Then, velocity and acceleration of the object is
v = cntn–1
And a = cn(n –1)tn–2
6. What is the slope of the curve y = xn?
A) n B) xn C) nxn–1 D) (n – 1)xn
7. What is the acceleration of an object at t = 1 for which the distance is s = bt5?
A) 5 b B) 20 b C) 30 b D) 0
8. If s is related to t by s = ct , what is its velocity at t = 0?
n

A) 5 d B) 20 d C) 30 d D) 0
Matrix Match Type
9. The s-t graph of an object is shown below.
D
B
C
A

Column I Column II
A) OA p) Velocity = 0
B) AB q) Velocity = constant
C) BC r) Velocity is increasing with time
D) CD s) Velocity is decreasing with time

Integer Answer Type.

10. A boy first runs a distance of 100 meters in 50 seconds while going from his home to a shop in the east direction,
and then runs a distance of 100 meters again in 50 seconds in the reverse direction moving from the shop to
home. What is the average speed of the boy?

49
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. An object moving with a speed of 5 m/s comes to rest in 10 s, after the brakes are applied. The distance
travelled by the object is 5 n where n is
12. A body moving with uniform acceleration travels 24 m in the 6th second and 44 m in the 11th second. What is the
initial velocity of the body in m/s.
Reasoning Type.
Each question contains Statement I and Statement II. Of these Statements, mark correct choice if
A) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
B) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
13. Statement I : The speed of a body can be negative.
Statement II : If the body is moving in the opposite direction of position of motion, then its velocity is negative.
14. Statement I : For an object not in rest, the average velocity and average acceleration can both be zero.
Statement II : Average values and instantaneous values are always equal.
NTSE PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS
1. Which motion does the graph of distance and time shows for accelerated motion? (2015)
Distance

Time

A) non uniformaly accelerated B) constant velocity

C) uniformly accelerated D) uniformly retarded motion
2. A balloon is moving up from the ground in such a way that its acceleration is linearly decreasing with its height
above the ground. It starts from the ground with acceleration 4 m/s2 and with zero initial velocity. Its acceleration
becomes zero at a height 3 m. The speed of the balloon at a height 1.5 m is: (2015)
A) 4 m/s B) 8 m/s C) 6 m/s D) 3 m/s
3. A train can accelerate at 20 cm/s2 and decelerate at 100 cm/s2. Then the minimum time for the train to travel
between the stations 2 km apart is ....... (The train should start at one station and stop at another station).
A) 125 s B) 100 s C) 155 s D) 200 s (2015)
4. Two bodies of masses ma and mb are dropped from different heights ‘a’ and ‘b’. The ratio of time taken by
them to reach the ground is : (2017)

1 1
A) a: b B) a : b C) : D) ma : mb
a b

50
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

5. A ball is shot vertically upward with a given initial velocity. It reaches a maximum height of 100 m. If on a
second shot, the initial velocity is doubled then the ball will reach a maximum height of (2018)
A) 70.7 m B) 141.4 m C) 200 m D) 400 m
6. Two objects moving along the same straight line are leaving point A with acceleration a, 2a and initial velocity
2u, u at time t = 0. The distance moved by objects with respects to point A when one object, initially behind
other, overtakes the other is (2017)

6u 2 2u 2 4u 2 8u 2
A) B) C) D)
a a a a
7. A body falls freely from a tower and travels a distance of 40 m in its last two seconds. The height of the tower
is (take g = 10 m/s–2) (2017)
A) 54 m B) 45 m C) 80 m D) 65 m
8. The velocity-time graph of an object moving along a straight line is as shown in the figure. The distance
covered by the object between t = 0 to 4 s is ....... (2019)

C
30 ms–1

20 ms
–1 A B

–1
v ms

D X
O 2s 4s 6s 7.5 s

A) 80 m B) 60 m C) 40 m D) 20 m
9. A boy moving along a circular path of radius 10 m completes 3/4th of the circle in 10 sec. The magnitude of
speed and velocity are (2019)
A) 4.71 m/s and 47.1 m/s B) 1.57 m/s and 4.71 m/s
C) 4.71 m/s and 1.57 m/s D) 1.41 m/s and 1.57 m/s
10. The velocity-time graph of an object thrown vertically up is (2019)

V
V V
A) B) V C) D) t
t t t

51
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. A body starts from rest is accelerated uniformly for 30 s. If x1, x2, x3 are the distances travelled in first 10 s,
next 10 s and last 10 s respectively, then x1 : x2 : x3 is (2019)
A) 3 : 2 : 1 B) 1 : 2 : 4 C) 1 : 3 : 5 D) 1 : 2 : 3
12. The velocity-time graph of a moving body is shown in the figure. (2019)

O t

Which of the following statements is true?

A) The acceleration is constant and positive
B) The acceleration is constant and negative
C) The acceleration is increasing and positive
D) The acceleration is decreasing and negative
13. Consider the motion of a tip of the minute hand of a clock in one hour. Which of the following statement is
wrong?
A) The average speed of the tip is zero B) Average acceleration of the tip is zero
C) Average velocity of the tip is zero D) The displacement of the top is zero
14. Two extreme ends of a moving train (engine and guard coach) pass a pole with speeds U and V respectively
with a constant acceleration. The speed with which the middle point of the train will pass the same pole is

UV V2  U2 UV U2  V2
A) B) C) D)
2 2 2 2

15. An athlete completes one round of circular track of radius r in 30 s with uniform speed. The ratio of distance
to the displacement travelled by the athlete at the end of 45 s is

2 3
A) 2 r B) r C)  D) 2
3 2
16. A car is moving with a constant speed of 70 km/h. Which of the following statements is correct?
A) The acceleration of the car is definitely zero.
B) The car has an acceleration only if it is moving along a curved path.
C) The car may have an acceleration even if it is moving along a straight path.
D) The car may not have an acceleration even if it is moving along a curved path.

52
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

17. The figure below shows the position of a ball at t = 0, t = 1 s, t = 2 s, t = 3 s and t = 4 s :

t=4 t=3 t=2 t=1 t=0

x

x =0

Which of the graph below is a possible graph of the position x(t)?

x x x x
A) B) C) D)
O O O O
t t t t

18. The graph shows position as a function of time for two trains A and B running on parallel tracks. For times
greater than t = 0, which of the following statement is true?
A
position

time
O
A) Both trains may have the same velocity at some time earlier than tB
B) At time tB, both trains have the same velocity
C) Both trains speed up all the time.
D) Graph indicates that both trains have the same acceleration at a given time
19. The figure shown below depicts the distance travelled by a body as a function of time.

20
Distance (in m)

10

10 20
Time (in sec.)
The average speed and maximum speed between 0 and 20 s are :
A) 1 m/s, 2.0 m/s respectively B) 1 m/s, 1.6 m/s respectively
C) 2.0 m/s, 2.6 m/s respectively D) 1.3 m/s, 2.0 m/s respectively

53
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. Four students discuss about the possible paths of a particle moving with constant speed. See the table for the
results of the discussion.

Name Possible path or paths

Anand Any path
Srinu Straight line, Circle, Helix
Krishna Straight line
Somesh Straight line, Circle

Who is correct? Assume that the forces acting on the particle are time independent.
A) Srinu B) Somesh C) Anand D) Krishna

54
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

CHAPTER - 3
PROJECTILE MOTION, SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
AND CIRCULAR MOTION
PROJECTILES
An object thrown with an initial velocity in any direction and then allowed to travel freely under gravity, its
motion is called projectile motion. Acceleration due to gravity is assumed to be constant throughout its motion and
air resistance offered to the motion is negligible. Projectile motion is a two dimensional motion or assumed to be the
superposition of two motions - one horizontal motion with velocity u x  u cos  and acceleration ax = 0 and the
other vertical motion with velocity u y  u sin  and acceleration ay = –g.

The motion of a particle projected with initial velocity u from origin O at an angle  with the horizontal.

The motion is divided into horizontal and vertical motion.

Equations for horizontal motion
u x  u cos 
Using the equation v = u + at
v x  u x  0  t   u x  u cos 
i.e., horizontal velocity is constant always.
1 1
x  u x t  a x t 2  u cos t   0  t 2  u cos  t
2 2
x
t ------(1)
u cos 
 Horizontal displacement = horizontal velocity × time.

55
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

For vertical motion

v y  u y  a y t  u sin   gt

v 2y  u 2y  2a y y  u 2 sin 2   2gy

1 1
y  u y t  a y t 2  u sin t  gt 2 ---------(2)
2 2

 v  v x i  v y j  u cos i   u sin   gt  j
Velocity at any height.
At any height h
v x  u x  u cos 

v 2y  u 2y  2gh   u sin    2gh

2

v 2x  v 2y  u 2  cos 2   sin 2    2gh  u 2  2gh  cos 2   sin   1

| v | u 2  2gh
Trajectory
The path followed by a projectile i.e., a curve joining positions of the same particle at different instants of
time is its Trajectory.
Substituting the value of t from equation (1) in (2)
gx 2
y  x tan  
2u 2 cos 2 

 x 2u 2 sin  cos 
 x tan  1   R
 R g
This equation is similar to that of a parabola.
Time of flight (T)
The total time taken by projectile to go up and come down to the same level from where it is projected is
called time of flight.
By first equation of motion
v = u + at
For vertical motion
At highest point, velocity is zero.
u sin 
 0  u sin   gt i.e., t  g
Since the time taken to go up is equal to the time taken to come down. So the time of flight
2u sin 
T  2t 
g

56
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Another method
Time taken to reach the same level is T. When it reaches the same level, the vertical displacement is zero.
1
So, y  u y t  a y t
2

1 2u y 2u sin 
0  u y T  gT 2 ; T  
2 g g
Maximum Height attained (H)

vy = 0

u
H

R x

T
During its travel it reaches a maximum height H at t  .
2
At maximum height vy = 0,
By 3rd equation of motion
u 2y u 2 sin 2 
v  u  2gh
2 2  H 
y y
2g 2g

u 2 sin 2 
Maximum height H   max
2g
For maximum, sin 2   max  1 i.e., when   90o

u 2 sin 2 90 u 2
 H max  
2g 2g
i.e., the projectile will have maximum height when it is projected at an angle 90o with horizontal.
Horizontal Range
Horizontal distance travelled by a body during the time of flight is called horizontal range. Using the second
equation of motion.
2u sin 
s = ut + ½at2, s = R, u  u cos  , tT ,a=0
g

2u sin  u 2 .2sin  cos  u 2 sin 2

R  u cos .  
g g g
Maximum Range

u 2 sin 2
R
g

57
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Range is maximum, when sin 2 is max.

i.e., when sin 2  1
i.e., 2  90 or   45o
 The horizontal range of a projectile is maximum when it is projected at an angle 45o with horizontal and
the maximum value of Range is
u2
R max 
g
There are two angles of projection for a particle to reach the same range. If  is the angle of projection for
a projectile to reach a horizontal range R, then the particle can also reach the same range when it is projected at an
angle  90    with the horizontal. The Trajectory, time of flight and maximum height will be different.

Range same for angle of projection  and   90o   .

u 2 sin 2 u sin 2  90    u 2 sin 2

2

R    R
g g g

Where    90   

u 2 cos 2
This is also the case when 1   45    and   45   equal to g
.

Range same for angle of projection   45o   and   45o   .

In projectile motion the horizontal component of velocity  u cos   , acceleration (g) and mechanical energy
remains constant.
Example 1: A particle is projected under gravity at an angle of projection 45o with the horizontal, has a horizontal
range of 36 m. Find the maximum height attained, Also find its initial velocity and time of flight.
Maximum Height H.   45o

u2
Horizontal Range R. = 36 m i.e., R max   36cm
g

58
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

2
u 2 sin 2  36x  1 
Maximum height, h     9m
2g 2  2 

H tan  R tan  36  1
or  , H  9 m
R 4 4 4

u2
R max  ;  u  R max g  36 10  360  18.97 m / s
g

2u sin  2  18.97  1 / 2
T   2.68 sec
g 10

Example 2: The vertical height of a projectile at time t is given by y  4t  t 2 and the horizontal distance covered is
given by x  3t . What is the angle of projection with the horizontal.
y  4t  t 2
dy dx
Derivative of displacement is velocity;  v y   4  2t also  vx  3
dt dt
vy vx
uy  4 ux  3 
t0 t0

y u 4  4
The angle of projection  tan   u  3 ;   tan 1  
x  3
Example 3: Two projectiles A and B are projected with the same speed at an angle 30o and 60o to the horizontal.
Determine their ratio of time of flights, range and maximum height reached.
T1 2u sin 1 sin 30 1 / 2 1
    , T2  3 T1
T2 2u sin 2 sin 60 3/2 3

Range is the same for  and  90   

 Here R 1  R 2 , since 1  30o and 2  90  30

u 2 sin 21
1 / 2 
2
H1 u 2 sin 2 1 sin 2 30 1
R1 g sin 60    
   1 , R1 = R2; H 2 u 2 sin 2  2 sin 2 60
  3; H 2  3H1
2
R 2 u 2 sin 22 sin120 3/2
g

Example 4: An object projected so that it just clears the walls of height 600m with separation 63 m from each other.
The time of passing between the walls is 7 sec, then find the range of the projectile.

600 m

t=7
t t x
63m

59
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1 1
h  gt1t 2 ; 600   10t  t  7 
2 2
120  t 2  7 t ; t 2  7t  120  0 ,  t  15 t  8  0 ; t  8 sec
Distance between walls  63  u cos   7 ;  u cos   9
 Horizontal range = u cos   T  9  23  207 m
Horizontal projection from a height
Let a particle is projected horizontally with initial velocity u from a height h.
ux = u
uy = 0 vx = u
x
vy v
h

For horizontal projection vx = ux = u and uy = 0.


vy = uy + gt, vy = gt  v  u ˆi  gt ˆj

v  u 2   gt 
2

vy gt
tan   
vx u
Position at anytime t
Take point of projection as origin, the position vector at any time t,
r  x ˆi  y ˆj
x = ut
1
y  gt 2
2
2
 2  1
Displacement s  | r |   ut    gt 
2

2 
Time of flight (T)
1
Vertical displacement, –h  u y t  a y t 2
2
1
h  0  gt 2
2

2h
T
g
Horizontal range (R) = horizontal velocity × time of flight
2h
 ux  T  u
g

60
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Example 5: A relief aeroplane is flying at a constant height of 1960 m with speed 60 km/hr above the ground
towards a point directly over a person struggling in flood water. At what angle of sight, should the pilot release a
survival kit if it is to reach the person in water?

5  500 
Solution : As the plane is flying at a speed of 600    , i.e.,   m/s horizontally (at a hieght of 1960 m above
 18   3 
the ground), the time taken by the kit to reach the ground.
2h 2  1960
t   20 s
g 9.8
And in this time the kit will move horizontally by
 500   10000 
x = ut =    20   m
 3   3 
So the angle of sight
x 10000 10
tan      1.7  3
h 3  1960 5.88

i.e.,   tan
1
 3   60 o

Example 6: An aeroplane is flying in a horizontal direction with a velocity 600 kmh–1 at a height of 1960 m. When
it is vertically above the point A on the ground, a body is dropped from it. The body strikes the ground at point B.
Calculate the distance AB.

1
Solution: From h  gt ,
2

2h OA 2  1960
We have t OB  g

9.8
 20 s

 5
Horizontal distance AB = vtOB   600    20   3333.33m  3.33 km
18
 

61
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 7: A bomber plane moves horizontally with a speed of 500 ms–1 and a bomb releases from it, strikes the
ground in 10 s. Angle at which it strikes the ground will be  g  10 ms 2  .

1 1 1
A) tan   B) tan   C) tan 1 1 D) tan 1  5
5 5
Ans: A
Solution: Horizontal component of velocity v x  500 ms1 and vertical components of velocity while striking the
ground
v y  0  10  10  100 ms 1

1 y v  1  100  1
 Angle with which it strikes the ground;   tan  v   tan  500  ;  
  tan 1  
 x  5
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
Periodic Motion
A motion which repeats at regular intervals of time is called a periodic motion. The fixed interval of time after
which the motion is repeated is called period of motion.
Examples of periodic motion
1 The revolution of earth around the sun is a periodic motion. Its period of revolution is one year.
2 The rotation of earth about its polar axis is a periodic motion. Its period of rotation is one day.
3 The motion of hands of a clock is a periodic motion. The period of motion of hour’s hand of a clock is 12
hours, of minute’s hand of a clock is 1 hour and of second’s hand of a clock is one minute.
4 The motion of moon around the earth is a periodic motion. Its period of motion is 27.3 days.
Oscillatory Motion
Oscillatory or Vibratory motion is that motion in which a body moves to and fro or back and forth repeatedly
about a fixed point (called mean position), in a definite interval of time. In such a motion, the body is confined within
well defined limits (called extreme positions) on either side of the mean position.
The oscillatory motion is also called a harmonic motion.
Examples of Oscillatory Motion
1 The motion of the pendulum of a wall clock is oscillatory motion.
2 The motion of the bob of a simple pendulum when it is displaced from its mean position and left to itself, is
oscillatory motion.
3 The motion of a loaded spring, when the load attached to the spring is pulled a little from its mean position
and left to itself, is oscillatory motion.
4 The motion of liquid contained in U-tube when it is compressed in one limb and left to itself, is oscillatory
motion.

62
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Harmonic Oscillation
Harmonic oscillation is that oscillation which can be expressed in terms of single harmonic function (i.e. sine
function or cosine function). In such oscillation, when a body is displaced a little from its equilibrium position (i.e.
mean position) and then left to itself, it begins to oscillate to and fro about the mean position under a restoring force,
which is always directed towards the mean position and whose magnitude at any instant is proportional to the
displacement of the body from the mean position at that instant. In the absence of frictional forces, the harmonic
oscillation possesses constant amplitude. A harmonic oscillation of constant amplitude and of single frequency is
called simple harmonic oscillation.
Some important definitions related to periodic motion
(a) Time period. It is the least interval of time after which the periodic motion of a body repeats itself. It is
denoted by T. S.I. unit of T is second.
(b) Frequency. It is defined as the number of periodic motions-executed by the body per second. It is denoted
by v. Clearly, v = 1/T.S.I. unit of v is hertz (denoted by Hz), where 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second= lc.p.s.

(c) Angular frequency of a body executing periodic motion is the angular displacement per unit time  
t
Angular frequency,     2  2  2 / T . S.I. unit of  is rad s–1
(d) Angular Displacement. It is the angle through which an object moves on a circular path.
s
  . s - length of arc; r - radius.
r
Simple Harmonic Motion
Simple Harmonic motion is a special type of periodic motion, in which a particle moves to and fro repeatedly
about a mean (i.e. equilibrium) position under a restoring force, which is always directed towards the mean (i.e.
equilibrium) position and whose magnitude at any instant is directly proportional to the displacement of the particle
from the mean (i.e. equilibrium) position at that instant.
If a particle executing simple harmonic motion, has a displacement y from its equilibrium position, at an instant
the magnitude of the restoring force F acting on the particle at that instant is given by
F = – ky----------------(1)
where k is known as force constant. Its S.I. unit is Nm-1. The negative sign in (1) shows that the restoring force F is
always directed towards the mean position.
Displacement of the particle executing simple harmonic motion at an instant can be expressed in terms of one
simple harmonic function (i.e. sine or cosine function). Hence it is called S.H.M.
Simple Pendulum
A simple pendulum is the most common example of bodies executing S.H.M. An ideal simple pendulum
consists of a heavy point mass body suspended by a weightless inextensible and perfectly flexible string from a rigid
support about which it is free to oscillate.
In equilibrium position, the centre of gravity of the sphere O lies vertically below the point of suspension S.
Here O is called equilibrium position or mean position or point of oscillation of simple pendulum. The distance
between point of suspension and the point of oscillation is called the effective length of simple pendulum.

63
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Expression for time period

Let m = mass of the bob
l = length of the simple pendulum and
OP = x.
When the bob is displaced to position P, through a small angle  from the vertical, the various forces acting on the
bob at P are
A


l
T mg cos 

Q B P

O A
mg sin  mg

l
The period of a simple pendulum is given by T  2
g
CIRCULAR MOTION
Motion in a circular path is called circular motion. It is of two kinds - uniform or non-uniform. If the speed of
motion is same in the circular path, the motion is called uniform circular motion. If the speed varies - may increase
or decrease, then it is non-uniform circular motion.
In a circular motion of radius r,
arc length x
(i) Angular displacement   
radius r
f  i
(ii) Angular velocity  
t
x
r


(iii) Linear velocity v = radius × angular velocity

v  r
f  i
(iv) Angular acceleration  
t
(v) Linear acceleration a = radius × angular acceleration.
Linear acceleration a  r

64
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Uniform Circular Motion

P'
S

O r P

(i) If the radius vector sweeps out equal angles in equal times, then its motion is said to be uniform circular motion.
(ii) In uniform circular motion speed remains constant.
(iii) Linear velocity, being a vector quantity, its direction changes continuously.
(iv) The direction of velocity is along the tangent at every point.
Angular displacement
In a circular motion, the angle subtended at the centre by an arc of the circular path of motion is called the
angular displacement    . It is measured in radians. One radian is that angular displacement whose arc length is
equal to the radius of the circle.
Angular velocity

The angular displacement of a moving object per second is called its angular velocity   .

Angular displacement   
Angular velocity   =   --------(1)
Time taken  t 
It is expressed in radian per second.
(i) A vector quantity.
(ii) Direction is perpendicular to plane of rotation.
Note: If the particle is revolving in the clockwise direction then the direction of angular velocity is perpendicular
to the plane downwards. Whereas in case of anticlockwise direction, the direction will be upwards.
(iii) Unit is Radian/sec.
(iv) In uniform circular motion the direction of angular velocity is along the axis of rotation which is constant
throughout.
(v) Angular velocity remains constant in magnitude as well as in direction.
(vi) v  r where r = radius of the circle.
Angular acceleration :

The change in angular velocity in unit time is called the angular acceleration    .

Change in angular velocity 2  1 

Angular acceleration  Time taken

t 2  t1

t --------(2)
Unit is Radian/s2

65
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Time period :
(i) It is the time taken to complete one complete revolution.
(ii) In one revolution, angle subtended is 2 and if T is the time period, then the angular velocity is given by

2 2
 or T  --------(3)
T 
Frequency :
(i) Frequency is defined as the number of revolutions per second.
1 
i.e., n 
 --------(4)
T 2
Motion with constant angular acceleration
Circular motion with constant angular acceleration is analogous to one dimensional translational motion with
constant acceleration. Hence, all the equations of motion have same form.
0  Initial angular velocity
  Final angular velocity
  Constant angular acceleration
  Angular displacement
 0  t ------- (5)

1
  0 t  t 2 ------- (6)
2

2  0 2  2 ------- (7)

   0 
  t
 2 

 2n  1 ------- (8)
n th  0 
2
Radial and Tangential Acceleration
There are two types of acceleration in circular motion; Tangential acceleration and centripetal acceleration.
(a) Tangential Acceleration :
Component of the acceleration directed along the tangent of the circle is called the tangential acceleration. It is
responsible for changing the speed of the particle. It is defined as,
v
at  = Rate of change of speed
t

a t  r   angular acceleration
r  distance of the particle from axis of rotation.

66
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Important Points:
  
(i) In vector form a t  r  
(ii) If tangential acceleration is directed in the direction of velocity then the speed of the particle increases.
(iii) If tangential acceleration is directed opposite to the velocity then the speed of the particle decreases.
(iv) Tangential acceleration is zero in uniform circular motion.
(b) Centripetal Acceleration :
(i) In uniform circular motion acceleration is directed towards the centre and the direction of velocity at any
instant is given by the tangent at that point.
(ii) Since the acceleration is always directed towards the centre in a uniform circular motion, it is called
centripetal acceleration.
(iii) In uniform circular motion magnitude of centripetal acceleration remains constant.
v2
ac  --------(9)
r
Centripetal force :
(i) Always acts towards centre.
(ii) Centripetal force is required to move a particle in a circle.
(iii) Because Fc is always perpendicular to velocity or displacement, hence the work done by the force will
always be zero.
Important point :
mv 2
Remember is not a force itself. It is just the value of the net force acting along the inside normal which is
r
responsible for circular motion. This force may be friction, tension, spring force, gravitational force or a combination
of them.
So to solve any problem in uniform circular motion we identify all the force acting along the normal (towards
mv 2
center), calculate their resultant and equate it to .
r
(c) Total Acceleration
Total acceleration is the vector sum of centripetal acceleration and tangential acceleration.
  
a  ar  at ; a  a 2t  a r2 --------(10)

a
at


ar

at
tan  
a r --------(11)
67
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 8 : A particle travels in a circle of radius 20cm at a speed that uniformly increases. If the speed changes
from 5.0 m/s to 6.0 m/s in 2.0 s, find the angular acceleration.
Solution : Since speed increases uniformly, average tangential acceleration is equal to instantaneous tangential
acceleration
 The instantaneous tangential acceleration is given by
v 2  v1 6.0  5.0
at   m / s 2  0.5m / s 2
t 2  t1 2.0

0.5 m / s 2
The angular acceleration is   a t / r   2.5 rad / s2
0.20 m
Example 9 : An object is moving in a uniform circular motion with radius 1 m and time period  seconds. Calculate
the speed of the object.
Solution : The given object is moving in a uniform circular motion wtih radius 1 m and time period  seconds.
r = 1 m.
T =  seconds.
Equation for speed is given as
2r 2 1
v   2 m/s
T 
Here the speed of the object is 2 m/s.
Example 10 : An athlete takes equal time to travel two circular paths A and B respectively. The path A has double
the radius of path B. The athlete is running a uniform circular motion on both paths. What is the ratio of the speeds
of the athlete on both paths.
Solution : Let the radius of path A be rA and the radius of path B is rB. The radius of path A is double that of path
B. So radius of path A is 2rB.
2r
v
T
Let us assume velocity on path A is vA and that on path B is vB. The athlete takes equal time to travel both the
paths. So let us assume the time taken by the athlete in both the paths is T second.
v A 2 rA / T rA 2r
    2
v B 2 rB / T rB r

vA
i.e., v  2
B

Thus the speed of the athlete on path A is double the speed of the athlete on path B.
Motion in vertical circle
Let us consider the motion of a point mass tied to a string of length  and whirled in a vertical circle. If at any
time, the body is at an angular position  , as shown in the figure, the forces acting on it are tension T in the string
along the radius towards the center and the weight of the body mg acting vertically downward.
Applying Newton’s law along radial direction,

68
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

l

T
v

mg sin  
mg mg cos 

mv 2
T  mg cos   m.a r 
l

mv 2
or T   mg cos  ------(12)
l
As the value of  varies during rotation the tension in the string also varies and it is minimum (0) at the top of
the circle and maximum at the bottom points.
Example 11: A person on a morning walk completes one round around a circular park of diameter 500 m in 1
minute. What will be the distance covered and the displacements at the end of 5 minutes 30 seconds?
1
Solution : In 5 minutes, 30 seconds the person completes the track 5 times.
2
At the end of this time the person reaches at the diametrically opposite point.
1
The distance travelled = 5   2r   5.5  D  5.5  3.14  500  8635 m
2
The displacement = D = 500 m.
Example 12: A car acquires a velocity of 40 km/h in 30 s, just after start. Calculate the acceleration of the car.
v  u 40  5
Solution : a    0.3704 ms 2
t 18  30

69
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

LEVEL I [HOMEWORK]
1. When air resistance is taken into account while dealing with the motion of the projectile which of the following
properties of the projectile, shows an increase in its value
A) range
B) maximum height
C) speed at which it strikes the ground
D) the angle at which the projectile strikes the ground
2. A ball thrown by one player reaches the other in 2 seconds. The maximum height attained by the ball above
the point of projection will be : (g = 10 m/s2)
A) 10 m B) 7.5 m C) 5 m D) 2.5 m
3. Two projectiles A and B are projected with angle of projection 30 for the projectile A and 45o for the
o

projectile B. If RA and RB are the horizontal ranges for the two projectiles, then
A) RA = RB B) RA > RB C) RA < RB
D) the information is insufficient to decide the relation of RA and RB.
4. A body is projected at an angle 30o to the horizontal with kinetic energy E. The KE at the top most point is
E E 3E
A) zero B) C) D)
4 2 4
5. A body is projected at an angle of 30o to the horizontal with speed 30 m/s. What is the angle with the
horizontal after 1.5 seconds? Take g = 10 m/s2.
A) 0o B) 30o C) 60o D) 90o
6. A projectile thrown at an angle of 45o to the horizontal has a range of 19.6 m. Its velocity at the highest point
is : (g = 10 m/s2)
A) 19.6 m/s B) 5 m/s C) 10 m/s D) Zero
7. The height y and the distance x along the horizontal plane of a projectile on a certain planet (with no surrounding
atmosphere) are given by y = (8t – 5t2) metre and x = 6t metre where t is in seconds. The velocity of
projection is
A) 8 m/sec B) 6 m/sec C) 10 m/sec D) not obtained from the data
8. Two projectiles X and Y thrown with speeds u and 3 u acquired the same maximum heights. If X thrown at
an angle 60o with the horizontal, the angle of projection of Y (with the horizontal) was
A) 75o B) 60o C) 45o D) 30o
9. From certain height, two bodies are projected horizontally with velocities 10 m/s and 20 m/s. They hit the
ground in t1 and t2 seconds. Then
A) t1  t 2 B) t1  2t 2 C) t 2  2t1 D) t1  2t 2

10. A ball is thrown from the ground with a velocity of 20 3 m/s making an angle of 60o with the horizontal. The
ball will be at a height of 40 m from the ground after a time t equal to (g = 10 ms–2)
A) 2 sec B) 3 sec C) 2 sec D) 3 sec

70
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

11. A shell is fired from a canon with a velocity v at angle  with horizontal. At the highest point, it explodes into
two pieces of equal mass. One of the pieces retraces its path to the canon. The speed of the other piece just
after explosion is
3 3
A) 3v cos  B) 2v cos  C) v cos  D) v cos 
2 2
12. A body of mass m is projected with a velocity v at an angle of 45o with the horizontal. The change in its
momentum at the end of flight is:
A) 2 mv B) mv C) 2 mv C) 1.5 mv
13. The maximum range of a gun of horizontal terrain is 16 km. If g = 10 ms–2, then muzzle velocity of a shell must
be
A) 160 ms–1 B) 200 2 ms 1 C) 400 ms–1 D) 800 ms–1
14. The maximum height attained by a projectile does not depend on
A) acceleration of the projectile
B) angle of projection
C) magnitude of the initial velocity
D) mass of the projectile
15. A ball thrown upwards with a speed u attains maximum height h1. Another identical ball thrown upwards from
the same point with a speed 2u attains a maximum height h2. The relation between h1 and h2 is
A) h1h2 B) h2 = 2h1 C) h2 = 4h1 D) h1 = 2h2
16. A body is projected with a kinetic energy K at an angle  to the horizontal. The gain in potential energy at its
highest point is
K
A) K cos2  B) K sin 2  C) K D)
2
17. A large number of bullets are fired in all directions from the ground with same speed v0. The maximum area on
the ground on which these bullets will spread is
v 20 v 40  2 v 04  2 v 02
A) g B) g 2 C) g 2 D) g 2

18. The trajectories of 3 projectiles are shown in figure

A)  u y A   u y B   u y C B)  u y A   u y B   u y C

C)  u y A   u y B   u y  C D)  u y A   u y B   u y C

71
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

19. A particle moves such that its acceleration ‘a’ is given by a = –bx where x is the displacement from equilibrium
position and ‘b’ is constant. The period of oscillation is

2 2 2 x
A) B) C) D) 2
b b b b

20. Motion of an oscillatory liquid column in a u-tube is

A) periodic but not simple harmonic
B) non-periodic
C) Simple harmonic and time period is independent of the density of the liquid
D) simple harmonic and time period is directly proportional to the density of the liquid
21. The time period of simple harmonic motion depends upon
A) amplitude B) energy C) phase constant D) mass
22. Which of the following motions is not simple harmonic?
A) Vertical oscillations of a spring B) Motion of a simple pendulum
C) Motion of planet around the sun D) Oscillation of liquid in a u-tube
23. Simple harmonic motion is a type of
A) Translatary motion B) Circular motion C) Rectilinear motion D) Periodic motion
24. The angular speed of the engine wheel making 90 revolution per minute is

A) 1.5  rad s 1 B) 3  rad s 1 C) 4.5  rad s 1 D) 6  rad s 1

25. The angle between velocity and acceleration of a particle in uniform circular motion is
A) zero B) 45o C) 60o D) 90o
26. In uniform circular motion, the angle between displacement and force is
A) 30o B) 45o C) 60o D) 90o
LEVEL II
1. A ball of mass m is thrown vertically upwards. Another ball of mass 2 m is thrown at angle  with the vertical.
Both of them stay in air for the same period of time. The heights attained by the two balls are in the ratio of
A) 2 : 1 B) cos  :1 C) 1: cos  D) 1 : 1
2. A stone thrown at an angle  to the horizontal reaches a maximum height h. The time of flight of the stone is

2h sin  2 2h sin  2h 2h
A) g
B) g
C) 2 g D) g

72
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

3. Two particles are projected simultaneously in the same vertical plane, from the same point, both with different
speeds and at different angles with horizontal. The path followed by one, as seen by the other, is
A) a vertical line B) a parabola C) a hyperbola

D) a straight line making a constant angle   90o  with the horizontal


4.  
The velocity of a projectile at the initial point A is u  2iˆ  3jˆ m/s . Its velocity in (m/s) at point B is

A) 2iˆ  3jˆ B) 2iˆ  3jˆ C) 2iˆ  3jˆ D) 2iˆ  3jˆ

5. When a body is projected vertically up from the ground, its velocity is reduced to 1/3rd of its initial velocity at
height h above the ground. Then maximum height reached by the body is
4h 9h 10h
A) 3 h B) C) D)
3 8 9
6. The equation of a projectile is y = px – qx2, then its horizontal range is
p
A) q B) p C) pq D) q

7. If the time of flight of a projectile is doubled, the maximum height attained will be:
A) unchanged B) halved C) doubled D) four times
8. A projectile is fired at 30 , momentum p. Neglecting friction, the change in kinetic energy when it returns to the
o

ground will be
A) zero B) 30% C) 60% D) 100%
9. A monkey in a perch 20 m high in a tree drops a coconut directly above your head as you run with a speed of
1.5 m/s beneath the tree. How far behind you, does the coconut hit the ground?
A) strikes your head B) 3 m C) 13.3 m D) 20 m
10. A grass hopper finds that it can jump a maximum horizontal distance of 1 m. With what speed can it travel
along the path if it spends a negligible time on the ground.
A) 9.8 m/s B) 4.42 m/s C) 2.21 m/s D) 3.16 m/s
11. A projectile is fired at an angle of 30o to the horizontal such that the vertical components of its initial velocity
T
is 80 m/s. Its time of flight is T. Its velocity at t  has a magnitude of nearly (g = 10 m/s2).
4
A) 180 m/s B) 155 m/s C) 145 m/s D) 140 m/s

73
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

12. An aeroplane is flying at a constant horizontal velocity of 600 km/h at an elevation of 6 km towards a point
directly above the target on the earth’s surface. At an appropriate time, the piolet released a ball so that it
strikes the target on the earth. The ball will appear to be falling.
A) on a parabolic path as seen by pilot in the plane
B) vertically along a straight path as seen by an observer on the ground near the target.
C) on a parabolic path as seen by an observer on the ground near the target
D) on a zig-zag path as seen by pilot in the plane
13. An aeroplane is flying horizontally with a velocity of 600 km/h and at a height of 1960 m. When it is vertically
above a point A on the ground a bomb is released from it. The bomb strikes the ground at point B. The
distance AB is
A) 1200 m B) 0.33 km C) 3.33 km D) 33 km
14. Two simple pendulums of length l and 4l are suspended from same point and brought aside together and
released at the same time. If the time period of smaller pendulum is T there after how much time will they be
together again and moving in same direction.

T
A) B) T C) 2T D) None of these
2
th
1
15. At moon the weight of things become of weight on earth. What is the ratio of time period of simple
6
pendulum at earth to that on the moon.

A) 6 :1 B) 6 : 1 C) 1: 6 D) 1 : 6
16. A simple pendulum is made of a body which is a hollow sphere containing mercury suspended by means of a
wire. If a little mercury is drained off, the period of pendulum will :
A) remain unchanged B) increase C) decrease D) become erratic
17. The ratio of angular speeds of seconds hand and minutes hand of a clock is
A) 12 : 11 B) 24 : 11 C) 36 : 11 D) 60 : 1
18. In uniform circular motion, the work done by the centripetal force in half the rotation is equal to

A)  mv 2 B) 2 mv2 C) 2mv2 D) zero

19. The radius of the rear wheel of a tractor is 4 times the radius of the front wheel. If the angular velocity of the
front wheel is 8 rad s–1, the angular velocity of the rear wheel is
A) 16 rad s–1 B) 2 rad s–1 C) 4 rad s–1 D) 8 rad s–1
74
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

20. A motor car is travelling at 20 ms–1 on a circular road of radius 100 m. It is increasing its speed at the rate of
3 ms–2. Acceleration of motor car is
A) 3 ms–2 B) 5 ms–2 C) 8 ms–2 D) 2 ms–2
21. A body of mass 100 g is tied to a string of length 1 m and whirled in a vertical circle with minimum speed. The
speed of the body at the lower point of the circle is (g = 10 ms–1)
10
A) 10 ms 1 B) 10 2 ms 1 C) ms 1 D) 5 ms 1
2

LEVEL III
Multiple Correct.
1. Two particles are projected from the same point with the same speed, at different angles 1 and 2 to the
horizontal. Their times of flight are t1 and t2 and they have the same horizontal range. Then
t t t t
A) t  tan 1 B) t  tan 2 C) sin   sin 
1 1 1 2
D) 1  2  90o
2 2 1 2

2. The path of a particle moving under the influence of a force fixed in magnitude and direction is
A) straight line B) circle C) parabola D) ellipse
3. Two projectiles are fired from the same point with the same speed at angles of projection 60o and 30o
respectively. Which one of the following is true?
A) Their maximum height will be the same B) Their range will be the same
C) Their landing speed will be the same D) Their time of flight will be the same
Comprehension
The position vector r with respect to the origin of a particle varies with time t as
r   at  ˆi   bt  ct 2  ˆj where a, b and c are constants.

4. The trajectory of the particle is a

A) straight line B) circle C) parabola D) none of these
5. The magnitude of the initial velocity of the particle is
A) a 2  c 2 B) b 2  c 2 C) a 2  b2 D)  a  b  2c 
6. The angle  with the horizontal along which the particle is projected is given by

b a b 2c
A) sin   B) cos   C) tan   D) tan  
c c a a 2  b2
Numerical
7. A piece of stone is thrown from the top of a tower with a horizontal speed of 10 3 m/s . It is found that at a
point P along the path, the velocity vector of the stone makes an angle of 30o, with the horizontal. The point
P is reached in time t which is given by  g  10 m/s 2 

75
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

8. The instantaneous height y of a projectile and the distance x covered by it are as follows:
x = 5 t, y = 5t – 2 t 2
What is the acceleration due to gravity if distance is measured in metres and time in seconds?
9. A body is thrown with a velocity of 9.8 ms–1 making an angle of 30o with the horizontal. It will hit the ground
after a time
Matrix Match.
10. The quantities are given in column I and the angle between velocity and acceleration vectors in column II.
A) For a body projected p) Zero
vertically upwards
B) For a body falling q) 90o
freely
C) For a projectile given r) 180o
angular projection
D) For a body in a s) Changes
uniform circular from point
motion in a to point
horizontal

Reasoning Type.
Each question contains Statement I and Statement II. Of these Statements, mark correct choice if
A) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
B) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
11. Statement I : When range of a projectile is maximum, its angle of projection may be 45o or 135o.

u 2 sin 2
Statement II : HR  g
. When   45o or 135o, value of HR remains the same, only the sign changes.

12. Statement I : When speed of projection of a body is made n times, its time of flight becomes n times.
Statement II : This is because range of projectile becomes n times.

NTSE PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS

1. A body is thrown horizontally from the top of a tower of height 5 m. It touches the ground at a distance of 10
m from the foot of the tower. The initial velocity of the body is : (g = 10 ms–2)
A) 2.5 ms–1 B) 5 ms–1 C) 10 ms–1 D) 20 ms–1
2. Let R and H be the horizontal range and the maximum height reached in case of a projectile if a constant
horizontal acceleration of g/4 is imparted to the projectile due to wind then its range and the maximum height
will be :
A) (R + 2 H), 2H B) (R+ H/2), H C) (R + H), H D) (R + 2H), H

76
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

3. A man throws a ball making an angle of 60o with the horizontal. He runs on a level ground and catches the
ball. If he had thrown the ball with speed v, then his speed must be

v
A) v B) C) 2v D) v
2

4. A juggler tosses a ball up in the air with initial speed u. At the instant it reaches its maximum height H, he tosses
up a second ball with the same initial speed. The two balls will collide at a height.

H H 3H 3
A) B) C) D) H
4 2 4 4

5. Diagram shows trajectory of a cricket ball. The set of arrows which show the direction of the acceleration of
ball at points P and Q respectively is:

Y P Q

A) B) C) D)

77
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 4
FORCE AND LAWS OF MOTION

PART - 1
FORCE
(a) Definition of Force:
Force is a push or a pull which:
(i) Produces or tries to produce motion in a body at rest
or
(ii) Stops or tries to stop a moving body
Force cannot be seen but the effect of force on an object can be seen or felt.
Forces are of two types - Balanced and unbalanced forces.
Balanced force
When two forces of equal magnitude but acting in the opposite direction on an object simultaneously then the
object continues in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line. Such forces are balanced forces. e.g., when
a heavy box is pushed over a rough surface it does not move. Here the push applied on the box acts in the forward
direction. This is balanced by the friction between the lower surface of the box and the surface of floor.
Unbalanced forces
When two forces of unequal magnitude act in opposite direction on an object simultaneously, then the object
moves in the direction of larger force. These forces acting on the object are unbalanced force.
e.g., Dragging a box over a table having friction.
Basic or fundamental forces
All the forces observed in nature can be explained in terms of only following four basic interactions.
(1) Gravitational force
The force of interaction which exist between two particles due to their masses is called Gravitational force. The
gravitational force acts over long distance and also require no medium. It is the weakest force in nature and
always attractive. This force is calculated by Newtons law of gravitation.
Gm1m 2
| F |
r2
(2) Electromagnetic force
Force exerted by one particle on the other because of the electric charge on the particle is called electromagnetic
force. These forces can be attractive or repulsive, and they are long range forces. Also they depend on the
nature of the medium.
78
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Tension in a rope, force of friction, reaction, muscular force or force experienced by compressed spring are
manifestations of e.m. attractions or repulsions between atoms.
e.g., Tension in a stretched string, is due to attractions of atoms of the rope.
(3) Nuclear force
It is the strongest force which keeps nucleons (neutron and protons) together inside the nucleus inspite of the
large repulsion between protons.
It is charge independent. It is a short range force  1015 (= 1 fermi) existing only inside the nucleus.
(4) Weak force
It acts between any two elementary (sub atomic) particles. Due to this force a neutron changes into a proton
emitting an electron and anti-neutrino, which is called –ve  decay. It have very short range, smaller than size
of a proton or neutron. For two protons at a distance of 1 Fermi
FN : FEM : FW : FGR = 1 : 10–2 : 10–7 : 10–38
Classification of Forces on the Basis of Contact
On the basis of contact forces are classified into two categories.
(i) Contact forces.
(ii) Non contact or field forces
(a) Contact force:
Forces which are transmitted between bodies by short range atomic molecular interactions are called contact
forces. When two objects come in contact they exert contact forces on each other. e.g., Normal, Tension etc.
(b) Field force:
Force which acts on an object at a distance by the interaction of the object with the filed produced by other
object is called field force. e.g., Gravitational force, Electro magnetic force etc.

Central forces are force between two particles that depend only on the distance between the particles and
directed from one particle to the other. e.g., gravitational force, electrostatic force, spring force etc.
Force can also be classified as conservative and non-conservative forces
Conservative force
A force is said to be conservative if the amount of work done in moving an object against that force is
independent of the path. e.g., work done in moving a body against gravity between two points along different paths.
A force is conservative if the total work done by the force on an object in one complete cycle is zero. i.e., when the
object moves around any closed path.
If a force is conservative there will be no change of kinetic energy, i.e., KE  0
m B

A m

The work done in taking a body from A to B is mgh and if the body is released from B to A, we can recover
the work mgh. e.g., spring force, electrostatic force etc.

79
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Non-conservative force
If the work done in moving a particle between two points depends on the path taken between the points, then
the force is non-conservative.
eg., Friction
Also for a non conservative force the work done along a closed path will not be zero. So the work done by a
non conservative force is non-recoverable.
When a ball is released on the inner surface of a smooth hemisphere, it will move to the other side and reach
the same height before coming to rest momentarily. If the hemisphere is replaced by a surface shown in figure (b) in
order to reach the same height the ball will have to move a larger distance.

h h
v v

(a) (b) (c)

If the other side is made horizontal, the ball will never stop because it will never be able to reach the same
height, it means its speed will not decrease. It will have uniform velocity on the horizontal surface. Thus, if unbalanced
forces do not act on a body, the body will either remain at rest or will move with a uniform velocity. It will remain
unaccelerated.
NEWTON’S FIRST LAW OF MOTION
Every body continues in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line unless it is compelled by an
external force to change that state.
It means a body remain unaccelerated if and only if, the resultant force on it is zero.
In such a case the body is said to be in equilibrium.
1. First law defines force as - It is an agent which is capable of producing any change in the state of rest or motion
of a body.
2. It defines inertia - by which a body by itself opposes any change in its state of rest or of uniform motion.
INERTIA
(a) Definition of Inertia :
The tendency of the body to oppose the change in its states of rest or uniform motion in a straight line is called
inertia. Newton’s first law of motion is also called law of inertia.
(b) Description :
It follows from first law of motion that in absence of any external force, a body continues to be in its state of
rest or in uniform motion along a straight line. In other words, the body cannot by itself change. its position of rest or
of uniform motion.
(c) Inertia Depends upon Mass:
We know that it is difficult to move a heavier body than the lighter one. Similarly it is difficult to stop a heavier
body moving, than a lighter body moving with the same velocity. Thus, we conclude that mass of the body is the
measure of inertia, more the mass, greater the inertia.

80
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

TYPES OF INERTIA
There are three types of Inertia which are:
(a) Inertia of Rest :
The tendency of the body to oppose the change in its state of rest when some external unbalanced force is
applied on it, is called the inertia of rest.
Example based on Inertia of Rest :
(i) A person sitting in a bus falls backwards when the bus suddenly starts. The reason is that lower part of his
body begins to move along with the bus but the upper part of his body tends to remain at rest due to
inertia of rest.
(ii) If a coin is placed on a thick card over the mouth of a tumbler and the card is given a sudden jerk, the coin
will drop into the tumbler. The reason is that the motion of the card is very quick and it cannot be imparted
to the coin due to inertia of rest.

(b) Inertia of Motion :

The tendency of the body to opposes any change in its state of motion when some unbalanced forces are
applied on it, is called the inertia of motion.
Example based on Inertia of motion:
(i) An athlete runs a certain distance before taking a leap so that the inertia of motion at the time of leaping
may help him in his muscular efforts.
(ii) We remove snow or mud from our shoes by striking them against wall. On striking the wall, the feet comes
to rest whereas the snow which is still in motion separates from the shoes.
(c) Inertia of Direction:
The tendency of a body to oppose any change in its direction of motion is known as inertia of direction.
Example based on Inertia of Direction :
(i) If a car takes a turn along a curved track, the passengers experience a force acting away from the centre
of the curved track. This is the result of tendency of the passenger to continue moving along a straight path.
(ii) Tie a stone to the end of a string and holding other end of the string in hand, rotate the stone in a horizontal
circle. If during rotation, the string breaks at certain stage, the stone is found to fly off tangentially at that
point of the circle.

String
Breaks
String breaks, stone goes away
tangentially

81
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Definition of force from first law of motion :

According to first law of motion, if there is a force, there is a change in state of rest or uniform motion. If the
force is not sufficient, it may not produce a change but only try to do so. Hence, force is that which changes or
tries to change the state of rest or of uniform motion of a body in straight line.
PART -2
MOMENTUM
(a) Definition :
Momentum of a particle may be defined as the quantity of motion possessed by it and it is measured by the
product of mass of the particle and its velocity.

Momentum is a vector quantity and it is represented by p
 
 p  mv
Unit of Momentum :
(In C.G.S. System)  p =mv  gram × cm/s = dyne × s
(In S.I System)  p =mv  kg × m/s = Newton × s
(b) Description :
Suppose a cricket ball is rolling along the ground. Some force will be required to stop it. If, however it is rolling
with larger velocity, a greater force is required to stop it. Again, if a cricket ball and an iron ball of the same size are
made to roll with equal velocities, much greater force is required to stop the iron ball than cricket ball because the
mass of iron ball is greater than that of cricket ball.
NEWTON’S SECOND LAW OF MOTION
The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the applied unbalanced force i.e., Rate
of change of momentum  Force applied
Let a body is moving with initial velocity u and after applying a force F on it, its velocity becomes v in time t.
Initial momentum of the body p1= mu
Final momentum of the body p2= mv
Change in momentum in time t is mv - mu
mv  mu
So rate of change of momentum =
t
mv  mu
But according to Newton’s second law, F
t

mv  u  v  u   a (acceleration)
or F  Here,
t t
So F  ma ; or F = kma (Here k is proportionality constant).
If 1N force is applied on a body of mass 1kg and the acceleration produced in the body is 1 m/s2, then
1= k×1×1 or k = 1
Hence, F= ma
So the magnitude of the resultant force acting on a body is equal to the product of mass of the body and the
acceleration produced. Direction of the force is same as that of the acceleration.
82
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

UNITS OF FORCE
(a) In C.G.S. System:
 F  ma  gm  cm / s 2  Dyne
Definition of one dyne :
If m = 1 gm, a = 1cm/s2 , then F = 1 dyne.
When a force is applied on a body mass 1 gram and the acceleration produced in the body is 1cm/s2, then the
force acting on the body will be one dyne.
(b) In S.I. System :
F = ma  kg× m/s2 =Newton
Definition of One Newton :
If m = 1kg and a = 1m/s2 then by, F = ma ; F = 1×1 = 1 kg×m/s2 = 1 N.
If a force is applied on a body of mass 1kg and acceleration produced in the body is 1m/s2 , then the force
acting on the body will be one Newton.
Gravitational Units of Force
(c) Kilogram Force (kgf) :
Kilogram force (kgf) or kilogram weight (kg.wt) is force with which a mass of 1 kg is attracted by the earth
towards its centre.
1kgwt = 1kgf = gN = 9.8 N
(d) Gram Force (gf)
Gram force or gram weight is the force with which a mass of 1 gram is attracted by the earth towards its centre.
1gwt = 1gf = g dyne = 981 N
Relation between Newton and dyne
We know: 1N = 1kg × 1ms-2; or 1N = 1000 g × 100 cms-2 ; or 1N = 105 g cms-2 = 105 dyne
 1N = 105 dyne
Weight
Weight of a body is the force by which it is pulled by the gravity of a nearby astronomical body (usually earth).

If a body of mass m is located at a point where acceleration due to gravity is g, then weight w  mg  F . Unit of wt
is N in SI system.
Mass of Body is the amount of substance contained in a body. Unit of mass is kg in SI system or gm in cgs system.
Mass is constant everywhere, but weight depends on acceleration due to gravity. Also mass is a measure of
inertia possessed by a body. A body of larger mass have larger inertia.
FIRST LAW OF MOTION BY SECOND LAW OF MOTION
Description:
According to first law of motion, if there is a force, there is a change in state of rest or uniform motion. Hence
force is that which changes or tries to change the state of rest or of uniform motion of a body in straight line.
Hence, we get the definition of force from Newton’s first law of motion.
Newton’s first law of motion can be deduced from Newton’s second law of motion.
According to second law of motion,

83
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

P2  P1 mv  mu
F  
t t
mv  mu
If applied force is zero; 0
t
mv-mu = 0, i.e., where there is no force, change in momentum is zero.  mv = mu
i.e., v = u  Final velocity = initial velocity when there is no force.
It shows inertia of motion; If u = 0, v = 0
 
Then, v = u  Show the inertia of rest; v  u
 shows the inertia of direction, it means if applied force is zero, direction remains the same.
Thus, it follows that a body will continue to be in the state of rest or of uniform motion along a straight line if no
external force acts on it and this is the first law . Thus, first law can be deduced from second law of motion.
IMPULSE OF FORCE
A large force acting for a short time to produce a finite change in momentum is called impulsive force.
The product of force and time is called impulse of force.
i.e., Impulse = Force ×Time
or I = F  t
The S.I. unit of impulse is Newton- second (N-s) and the C.G.S unit is dyne - second (dyne-s)
Impulse and Momentum :
From Newton’s second law of motion
P2  P1
Force , F  or Ft  P2  P1
t
i.e., Impulse = Change in momentum
This relation is called impulse equation or Impulse - momentum theorem. It has an important application in our
everyday life.
Applications of Impulse Equation in Daily Life
(i) Catching the ball by a cricketer :
While catching a fast moving cricket ball, the player moves his hands backward after catching the ball. By
moving his hands, the cricketer increases the time. As a result he has to apply only a small force on the ball. In
reaction, the ball also applies lesser force and the hands of the player are not injured.

84
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

(ii) Jumping on a heap of sand :

If someone jumps from a height on a heap of sand then, his feet moves inside the sand very slowly. Due to this
momentum changes slowly producing a lesser force of action from the sand and the man is not injured.
(iii) Athletes :
Athletes are advised to come to stop slowly after finishing a fast race. In general, all changes of momentum
must be brought slowly to involve lesser forces of action and reaction to avoid injury.
Impulse during an impact or collision
The impulsive force acting on the body produces a change in momentum of the body on which it acts. We
know, Ft = mv -mu, therefore the maximum force needed to produce a given impulse depends upon time. If time is
short, the force required in a given impulse or the change in momentum is large and vice-versa.
PART - 3
NEWTON’S THIRD LAW
Newton’s third law states that every action is associated with an equal and opposite reaction. Thus in nature
force always occur between pairs of bodies. Any one of them called the action and the other reaction. It is clear from
third law that a single force can never exist.
So, according to newton’s third law for every action there is an equal and opposite reaction.
Faction=-Freaction  negative sign indicates that the reaction force is opposite to the direction of force.
(a) Practical Demonstration :
(i) When a ball strikes a wall, the following happens:

faction

ball

Faction= action force = force exerted by the ball on the wall.

freaction

ball

Freaction= reaction force = force exerted by the wall on the ball due to reaction force, the ball bounces back.
(b) Explanation :
It may be noted that action and reaction occur simultaneously. Action and reaction never act on same body.
Since action and reaction occur in pairs and act on two different bodies, it is impossible to have a single isolated
force.
(c) Examples :
(i) Swimming of a man : The man swims because he pushes water behind (action), water pushes man
forward (reaction).
85
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(ii) Walking of a man: Man pushes the earth behind from right foot (action). Earth pushes the man forward
(reaction). Then the man walks.

“NO ACTION IS POSSIBLE WITHOUT REACTION”

Examples:
(i) A nail cannot be fixed on a suspended wooden ball.
(ii) A paper cannot be cut by scissors of single blade.
(iii) A hanging piece of paper cannot be cut by blade.
(iv) Writing on a hanging page is impossible
(v) Hitting on a piece of sponge does not produce reaction. You do not feel hitting.
Action and reaction are not balanced
Action and reaction, though equal and opposite are not balanced because they act on two different bodies. In
case when they act on two different bodies forming a single system, they become balanced.
Any pair of equal and opposite forces is not an action-reaction pair
Consider a book kept on a table. We can see that the table pushes the book in the upward direction. Then why
does not the book fly up? It does not fly up because there is another force on the book pulling it down. This is the
force exerted by the earth on the book, which we call the weight of the book. So there are two forces on the book-
the normal force, N acting upwards, applied by the table and force , W acting downwards, applied by the earth. As
the book does not accelerate, we conclude that these two forces are balanced. In other words, they have equal
magnitude but opposite directions.

N
N=W

Can we call N action and W the reaction? We cannot. This is because, although they are equal and opposite,
they are not forces applied by two bodies on each other. The force N is applied by the table on the book, its reaction
will be the force applied by the book on the table. Weight W is the force applied by the earth on the book, its
reaction will be the force applied by the book on the earth.
So, although N and W are equal and opposite, they do not form an action-reaction pair.

86
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

PRINCIPLE OF CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM

By Newton’s second law, the rate of change of momentum is equal to the applied force.

Change in momentum
 Force
time
Change in momentum = F × t
If F = 0, then,
Change in momentum = 0
If the force applied on the body is zero then its momentum will be conserved, this law is also applicable on the
system. If in a system the momentum of the objects present in the system are P1, P2, P3...... and external force on the
system is zero, then -
P1+ P2 + P3+ ......... = Constant
NOTE: If only internal forces are acting on the system then its linear momentum will be conserved.
The Law of Conservation of Linear Momentum by Third Law of Motion ;
Suppose A and B are two objects of masses m1 and m2, moving in the same direction with velocity u1 and u2
respectively (u1 > u2 ). Object A collides with object B and after time t both move in their original direction with
velocity v1 and v2 respectively.
The change in momentum of object A = m1v1 – m1u1
m1 m2
u1 u2
before collision (u1 > u2)

Change in momentum
The force on B by A is F1 =
time
m1v1  m1u1
F1= -------- (1)
t
The change in momentum of object B = m2v2 – m2u2
Change inmomentum m v  m2u 2
The force on A by B is F2 =  2 2 -------- (2)
time t
m1 m2
v1 v2
after collision
By Newtons third law, F1= -F2
m1v1  m1u1  m v  m2u 2 
 2 2 
t  t 
 m1v1  m1u1   m 2 v 2  m 2 u 2
or m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
or Initial momentum = Final momentum

87
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Some illustrations on conservation of momentum

(a) Recoil of Gun :
A loaded gun (rifle) having bullet inside it forming one system is initially at rest. The system has zero initial
momentum.

M m v
v

T Bullet
Gun
When the trigger (T) is pressed, the bullet is fired due to internal force of explosion of power in cartidge inside.
The bullet moves forward with a high velocity and the gun move backward (recoils) with a lesser velocity.
Let the bullet and the gun have masses m and M respectively. Let the bullet move forward with velocity v and
the gun recoils with velocity V.
Initial momentum of the gun and bullet = 0.
Then final momentum of the gun and bullet is MV + mv
By the law of conservation of momentum, Initial momentum of the system = Final momentum of the system.
0 = MV + mv
mv
or V  
M

mv
Hence the recoil velocity of gun =
M

mv
and the velocity of the gun is = 
M
(b) The Working of a Rocket :
The momentum of a rocket before it is fired is zero. When the rocket is fired, gases are produced. These gases
come out of the rear of the rocket with high speed. The direction of the momentum of the gases coming out of the
rocket is in the downward direction. Thus, to conserve the momentum of the system ie. (rocket + gases), the rocket
moves upward with a momentum equal to the momentum of the gases. So, the rocket continues to move upward as
long as the gases are ejected out of the rocket. Thus a rocket works on the basis of the law of conservation of
momentum.
Classification of forces on the basis of contact
On the basis of contact, forces are classified into two categories
i) Contact forces
ii) Non contact or field forces
a) Contact force :
Forces which are transmitted between bodies by short range atomic or molecular interactions are called
contact forces. When two objects come in contact they exert contact forces on each other. e.g. Normal force,
Tension etc.

88
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

b) Field force :
Force which acts on an object at a distance by the interaction of the object with the field produced by other
object is called field force. e.g. Gravitational force, Electro magnetic force etc.
Contact force
a) Normal force (N) :
It is the component of contact force perpendicular to the surface. It measures how strongly the surface in
contact are pressed against each other. It is the electromagnetic force.
e.g.1, A table is placed on earth as shown in figure

Here table presses the earth so normal force exerted by four legs of table on earth are as shown in figure.

N1 N2
ground
N3 N4

e.g. 2, A boy pushes a block kept on a frictionless surface.

Block

(by boy) N Block

A block is kept on inclined surface. Component of its weight presses the surface perpendicularly due to which
contact forces acts between surface and block.

Normal force exerted by block on the surface of inclined plane is shown in figure. Here normal force is a
component of weight of the body perpendicular to the inclined surface i.e. N= mg cos 

N


89
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Force acts perpendicular to the surface

Illustrations
1.Two blocks are kept in contact on a smooth surface as shown in figure. Draw normal force exerted by
A on B.

A B

Sol. In above problem, block A does not push block B, so there is no molecular interaction between A and B.
Hence normal force exerted by A on B is zero.
Note: Normal is a dependent force it comes in role when one surface presses the other.
b) Tension :
Tension is the magnitude of pulling force exerted by a string, cable, rope etc. When a string is connected to a
body and pulled out, the string is said to be under tension. It pulls the body with a force T, whose direction is away
from the body and along the length of the string. Usually strings are regarded to be massless and unstretchable,
known as ideal string.

String
T

Block

Note: (i) Tension in a string is an electromagnetic force and it arises only when string is pulled. If a massless
string is not pulled, tension in it is zero.
(ii) String can not push a body in direct contact.
c) Friction force:
When a body is moving on a rough surface resistance to the motion occurs because of the interaction between
the body and its surroundings. We call such resistance as force of friction. Friction is also considered as component
of contact force which acts parallel to the surface in contact.
(i) Origin of friction : The frictional force arises due to molecular interactions between the surfaces at the
points of actual contact. When two bodies are placed one over other, the actual area of contact is much smaller than
the total surface areas of bodies.

Body 1

Body 2

Actual area of contact

90
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

(ii) Static and Kinetic Frictions:

Experiment :
(A) Consider a block placed on a table, and a small force F1 is acted on it. The block does not move. It
indicates that the frictional force fs starts acting in opposite direction of applied force and its magnitude is
equal to F1 (figure b). That is for the equilibrium of the block, we have
F1 – fs= 0 or F1 = fs
The force of friction when body is in state of rest over the surface is called static friction (fs).
(B) As the applied force increases the frictional force also increases. When the applied force is increased up
to a certain limit (F2) such that the block is on the verge of motion. The value of frictional force at this
stage is called limiting friction flim (figure c).

Fapplied = 0 V=0 V=0

M M F1 M F2
f3 flim

Fs = 0 fs = F1 flim = F2

(a) (b) (c)

V = constant
a
M F3 F4  f k
fk M F4 a
fk M
fk = F3

(d) (e)
(C) Once the motion started, A smaller force is now necessary to continue the motion (F3) and thus frictional
force decreases. The force of friction when the body is in state of motion over the surface is called kinetic
or dynamic friction fk (figure d).
Friction (f)

on
c ti
fri

Limiting Kinetic
tic

friction friction
Sta

45o
Applied force

In fig. (e) the body moves with an acceleration (a) when it is acted by a force (F4) of large magnitude.
F4  f k
So that a 
M

91
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(iii) More about frictional force:

(A) Static friction
1. The limiting friction depends on the materials of the surfaces in contact and their state of polishness.
2. The magnitude of static friction is independent of the apparent area of contact so long as the normal
reaction remains the same.
3. The limiting friction is directly proportional to the magnitude of the normal reaction between the two
surfaces i.e. flim =  s N . Here  s is coefficient of static friction.

f lim
 We can write,  s 
N
(B) Kinetic friction :
1. The kinetic friction depends on the materials of the surface in contact.
2. It is also independent of apparent area of contact as long as the magnitude of normal reaction remains the
same.
3. Kinetic friction is almost independent of the velocity, provided the velocity is not too large not too small.
4. The kinetic friction is directly proportional to the magnitude of the normal reaction between the surfaces.
f k   k N . Here  k is coefficient of kinetic friction

fk
 We can write,  k 
N
There are two types of Kinetic frictions:
(i) Sliding friction : The force of friction when one body slides over the surface of another body is called sliding
friction.

f
(a) Sliding of block
(ii) Rolling friction : When a wheel rolls without slipping over a horizontal surface, there is no relative motion of
the point of contact of the wheel with respect to the plane. Theoretically for a rolling wheel the frictional force
is zero. This can only possible when bodies in contact are perfectly rigid and contact of wheel with the surface
is made only at a point. But in practice no material body is perfectly rigid and therefore bodies get deformed
when they passed each other. The actual area of their contact no longer remains a point, and thus a small
amount of friction starts acting between the body and the surface. Here frictional force is called rolling friction.
It is clear from above discussion that rolling friction is very much smaller than sliding friction.

(b) Rolling of wheel

Note:  s and  k are dimensionless quantities and independent of shape and area of contact. It is a property of two
contact surfaces.  s will always be greater than  k . Theoretical value of  can be 0 to  but practical value
is 0    1.6 .
92
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Force Exerted by spring

A spring is made of a coiled metallic wire having a definite length. When it is neither pushed nor pulled then its
length is called natural length.
At natural length the spring does not exert any force on the objects attached to its ends. If the spring is pulled
at the ends, its length becomes larger than its natural length, it is known as stretched or extended spring. Extended
spring pulls objects attached to its ends.

If the spring is pushed at the ends, its length becomes less than natural length. It is known as compressed
spring. A compressed spring pushes the objects attached to its ends.

FREE BODY DIAGRAM

A free body diagram consists of a diagrammatic representation of single body or a subsystem of bodies isolated
from surroundings showing all the forces acting on it.
Steps for F.B.D.
Step 1: Identify the object or system and isolate it from other objects, clearly specify its boundary.
Step 2: First draw non-contact external force in the diagram, generally it is weight.
Step 3: Draw contact forces which acts at the boundary of the object of system. Contact forces are normal, friction,
tension and applied force. In F.B.D. internal forces are not drawn only external are drawn.
2. A block of mass ‘m’ is kept on the ground as shown in figure.

93
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(i) Draw F.B.D. of block.

(ii) Are forces acting on block forms action - reaction pair.
(iii) If answer is no, draw action reaction pair.
Solution: (i) F.B.D. of block

(ii) ‘N’ and mg are not action - reaction pair. Since pair act on different bodies, and they are of same nature.
(iii) Pair of ‘mg’ of block acts on earth in opposite direction.

and pair of ‘N’ acts on surface as shown in figure.

3. Two sphere A and B are placed between two vertical walls as shown in figure. Draw the free body diagrams
of both the spheres.

Solution: F.B.D. of sphere ‘A’

F.B.D. of sphere ‘B’.

Note: Here NAB and NBA are the action - reaction pair (Newton’s third law.)
4. Draw F.B.D. for systems shown in figure below.
94
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Solution:

Example 1 : Find the acceleration produced by a force of 200 N acting on a car of mass 800 kg.
Solution: Here, mass, m = 800 kg; Force, F = 200 N; a=?
Using, F = ma, we get
F 200 N 200 kg ms 2
a    0.25 ms 2
m 800 kg 800 kg

 1 N  1 kg ms 2 

Example 2 : A motorcycle of mass of 2000 kg is moving over a horizontal road, with uniform velocity. If this
motorcycle has to be stopped with a negative acceleration of 1.5 ms–2, then what is the force of friction between the
tyres of the motorcycle and the road?
Solution: Here, m = 2000 kg; a = –1.5 ms–2; F = ?
Using, F = ma, we get
F = –2000 kg × 1.5 ms–2 = –3000 kg ms–2 = – 3000 N
Example 3 : An iron sphere of 1 kg is moving a velocity of 20 ms–1 on a cemented floor. It comes to rest after
travelling a distance of 50 m. Find the force of friction between the sphere and the floor.
Solution : Here, m = 1 kg; u = 20 ms–1; v = 0;
S = 50 m; F = ?
Step 1. Using, v 2  u 2  2as ,

v 2  u 2 0   20 ms 
1 2
400 m 2s 2
we get a     4 ms 2
2S 2  50m 100 m

Step 2. Using, F = ma, we get

F = – 1 kg × 4 ms–2 = –4 kg ms–2 = – 4 N
Negative sign shows that the force is retarding force.
 Force of friction = 4 N.

95
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 4 : A car of mass 1000 kg moving with a velocity of 36 km/h hits a wall and comes to rest in 5 s. Find the
force exerted by the car on the wall.
Solution: Here, m = 1000 kg

5  5 
Initial velocity, u  36 km / h  36  ms 1  10 ms 1  1 km / h  ms 1 
18  18 
Final velocity, v = 0
Time, t = 5 s; F = ?
Using, F = ma, we get

vu  0  10 
F  m   1000    2000 N
 t   5 
Thus, force exerted by the car on the wall = 2000 N.
Example 5 : A gun fires a bullet of mass 50 g. The bullet moving with a velocity of 100 ms–1 strikes a sand bag and
gets embedded after travelling 10 cm. Calculate (i) the resistive force exerted by the sand on the bullet and (ii) the
time taken by the bullet to come to rest.
50 1
Solution: Here, m = 50 g =  kg  u = 100 ms–1
1000 20
v=0 ( finally bullet comes to rest)
S = 10 cm = 0.1 m; F = ? ; t = ?
(i) Using, v 2  u 2  2aS we get

v 2  u 2 0  10000 1
a   50000 ms 2  F  ma    50000   2500 N
2s 2  0.1 20

v  u 0  100
(ii) Using v = u + at, we get  t    2  103 s
a 50000
Example 6 : A mechanic strikes a nail with a hammer of mass 500 g moving with a velocity of 20 ms–1. The hammer
comes to rest in 0.02 s after striking the nail. Calculate the force exerted by the nail on the hammer.
1 1
Solution: Here, m  500g  kg; u  20 ms ; v = 0; t = 0.02 s; F = ?
2
Using, F = ma

 v  u  1  0  20 ms 
1
vu  F  m 
Since a    , so  kg    500 N
 t   t  2  0.02 s 

Therefore, force exerted by nail on the hammer = 500N.

Example 7 : The velocity-time graph of a ball of mass 25 g moving on road is as given below:
(i) How much force does the road exert on the ball to bring it to rest?
(ii) What is the direction of the force exerted by the road?

96
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Solution: Here, m = 25 g = 25 × 10–3 kg

u = 10 ms–1, v = 0, t = 4 s
vu
(i) Using F  ma  m   , we get
 t 

 0  10 
F  25  103  2
  6.25  10 N
 4 
Which is the force exerted by the road on the ball.
(ii) Force exerted by the road is in the direction opposite to the direction of motion of the ball.
Example 8 : A car of mass 1000 kg and a bus of mass 8000 kg are moving with same velocity of 36 km h–1. Find
the forces to stop both the car and the bus in 5 s.
5
Solution: Here, initial velocity, u = 36 km h–1  36  ms 1  10 ms 1
18
Final velocity, v = 0; Time t = 5 s.
vu
Step 1. a   ,
 t 

we get, a 
 0  10  ms 1  2 ms 2
5s
Mass of car, m = 1000 kg  Force required to stop the car,,
F  ma  1000 kg  2 ms 2   2000 N

Step 2. Mass of the bus, m = 8000 kg  Force required to stop the bus
F  ma  8000 kg  2 ms 2   16000 N

Negative sign with force shows that the force is applied in a direction opposite to the directions of the motion
of the car and the bus. Such a force is known as retarding force.
Example 9 : The velocity-time graph of a ball moving on the surface of floor is shown in figure. Calculate the
force acting on the ball, if mass of the ball is 20 g.
Solution: The velocity-time graph shows that the velocity of the ball at t = 0 is zero.
That is, initial velocity of ball, u = 0

97
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Velocity of ball at t = 4 s is 20 ms–1

That is, final velocity, v = 20 ms–1
time, t = 4 s; a = ? ; F = ?

vu
Step 1 : Acceleration of the ball, a   
 t 

20 ms 1  0
or a  or a  5 ms2
4s
Step 2 : Also, mass of ball,
20 1
m  20 g  kg  kg  Force acting on the ball, F = ma
1000 50

1
or F  kg  5 ms2  0.1 kg ms 2  0.1 N  1 kg ms 2  1 N 
50
Example 10 : A force of 5 N produces an acceleration of 8 ms–2 on a mass m1, and an acceleration of 24 ms–2 on
a mass m2. What acceleration would the same force provide if both the masses are tied together?
F 5 F 5
Solution: Here, F = 5 N, a1 = 8 ms–2 = a2 = 24 ms–2  m1   kg and m 2   kg
a1 8 a 2 24

5 5 20
Now, total mass   m1  m 2     kg
8 24 24
 acceleration, when both the masses are tied together,,
F 5  24
a   6 ms 2
m1  m 2 20
Example 11 : How much momentum will an object of mass 10 kg transfer to the floor, if it falls from a
height of 5 m (a = g = 10 ms–2)?
Solution: Here, initial velocity of sphere, u = 0
Distance travelled, S = 5 m
Acceleration of sphere, a = 10 ms–2
Step 1. Final velocity of sphere when it just reaches the ground can be calculated using
v2 – u2 = 2aS  v2  0  2  10ms 2  5m  100 m 2s 2 or v  100 m 2s2  10 ms 1

Momentum of the sphere just before it touches the ground = mv  10 kg  10 ms 1  100 kg ms1

98
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Step 2. On reaching the ground, the iron sphere comes to rest, so its final momentum = 0
According to the law of conservation of momentum,
Momentum transferred to the ground = momentum of the sphere just before it comes to rest
= 100 kg ms–1
Example 12 : An object of mass 20 kg is accelerated uniformly from a velocity of 36 km h 1 to 54km h 1 in 25 s.
Calculate (i) the initial momentum of the body, (ii) final momentum of the body and (iii) the force acting on the body.
Solution: Here, m = 20 kg

1 5
Initial velocity, u  36km h  36   10 ms 1
18

1 5
Final velocity, v  54 km h  54   15 ms1
18
Time, t = 25 s
i) Initial momentum, pi = mu = 20 kg × 10 ms–1 = 200 kg ms–1
ii) Final momentum, pf = mv = 20 kg × 15 ms–1 = 300 kg ms–1
iii) According to Newton’s second law of motion,

Force 
Change in momentum pf  pi

 300  200  kg ms 1
Time taken t or F  25 s
4 N

Example 13 : A bullet of mass 20 g moving with a velocity of 200 ms–1 gets embedded in a wooden block of mass
980g. Calculate the velocity acquired by the block.
20 2
Solution: Mass of bullet, m1  20 g   kg
1000 100

Initial velocity of bullet, u1  200 ms1

98
Mass of block, M1  980 g  kg
100
Initial velocity of block, u2 = 0
2
Initial momentum of bullet + block  m1u1  m 2 u 2   200  4 kg ms 1
100
Total mass of system when bullet is embedded in block,
M = 20 + 980 = 1000 g = 1 kg
Let V = common velocity of bullet + block.
 Final momentum of the system (bullet + block) = MV = V kg ms–1
According to the law of conservation of linear momentum,
Final momentum = Initial momentum
i.e., V = 4 ms–1  Velocity of the block = 4 ms–1

99
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 14 : An object of mass 1.5 kg travelling in a straight line with a velocity of 5 ms–1 collides with a wooden
block of mass 5 kg resting on the floor. This object sticks with the wooden block after collision and both move
together in a straight line. Calculate (i) the total momentum before collision, (ii) the total momentum after collision and
(iii) the velocity of the combination of these objects after collision.
Solution: Mass of object, m1 = 1.5 kg
Mass of wooden block, m2 = 5 kg
Initial velocity of the object, u1 = 5 ms–1
(i) Total momentum of the object and wooden block before collision
 m1u1  m 2 u 2  1.5kg  5 ms 1  5 kg  0  7.5 kg ms 1
(ii) Let v = velocity of the combination after collision
 Total momentum of the combination after collision
  m1  m 2  v  1.5  5  v  6.5 v kg m s 1
(iii) According to the law of conservation of momentum:
Total momentum before collision = Total momentum after collision
7.5
i.e., 7.5 = 6.5 v; or v   1.15 ms 1
6.5
Thus, velocity of the combination of the objects after collision = 1.15 ms–1
(iv) From equation (b), total momentum of the objects after collision
 6.5  1.15  7.5 kg ms 1
Example 15 : A revolver of mass 500 g fires a bullet of mass 10 g with a speed of 100 ms–1. Find (i) Momentum
of the bullet, (ii) Initial momentum of revolver and bullet as a system, (iii) Recoil velocity of the revolver.
1
Solution: Mass of revolver, M  500g  kg
2
1
Mass of bullet,  10 g  kg
100
Initial velocity of revolver + bullet, u = 0
Final velocity of bullet, v = 100 ms–1
Let, recoil velocity of the revolver = (V) ms–1
1
(i) Momentum of the bullet  mv  kg  100 ms 1  1kg ms 1
100
(ii) Initial momentum of revolver + bullet = (M + m) u = 0
V
(iii) Momentum of revolver after firing  MV  kg m s 1
2
According to the law of conservation of linear momentum,
Momentum of revolver + bullet after firing = Initial momentum of the revolver + bullet
V
i.e.  1  0 or V = – 2 ms–1
2
Thus, recoil velocity of revolver = 2 ms–1
100
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Apparent weight of a body

When a body is moving up or down in a lift with an acceleration, we feel that its weight has changed.
The feeling of weight comes due to the reaction of a supporting surface.
i.e., Wapp = Reaction of supporting surface
eg., weight of a body in lift
Consider a person standing on a lift (or for a body suspended from a spring balance.)
a) Lift is at rest or moving with constant velocity.
The person or body [fig. a] will be translatory equilibrium.
So, R = mg  Wapp  mg [as Wapp = R]
or Wapp = W0 [as W0 = mg = true weight]
i.e., apparent weight (reading of balance) will be equal to true weight.
b) Lift is accelerated up.
This implies that the lift starts moving up or if moving upwards its velocity increases or if moving downwards
its velocity decreases. If a is the acceleration of the body, from Newton’s II law [as shown in fig. b] we have
R – mg = ma or R = m(g + a)
or Wapp = m(g + a) [as Wapp = R]
 a
or Wapp  W0 1  g  [as W0 = mg]
 
i.e., apparent weight (reading of balance) will be more than true weight.

c) Lift is accelerated down.

This implies that the lift starts moving down or if in downward motion its velocity increases or if in upward
motion its velocity decreases. In this situation [as shown in fig. c] from Newton’s II law,
mg – R = ma i.e., R = m(g – a)
or Wapp = m(g – a) [as Wapp = R]

 a
i.e., Wapp  W0 1  g  [as W0 = mg = true weight]
 
i.e., apparent weight (reading of balance) will be lesser than true weight.
101
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

d) Lift is in free fall, i.e., a = g in case (c). So

mg – R = mg
i.e., R = 0
So, Wapp = 0

i.e., apparent weight of a freely falling body is zero (though true weight always remains mg). This is why the
(apparent) weight of a body is zero. i.e., body is weightless if it is in a (a) lift whose cable has broken, (b) orbiting
satellite and (c) cabin which is projectile.
Example 16 : A lift is going up; the total mass of the lift and the passenger is 1500 kg. The variation in the speed of
the lift is as shown in figure. (a) What will be the tension in the rope pulling the lift at ; (i) 1 s (ii) 6 s (iii) 11 s (b)What
is the height to which the lift takes the passenger? (c)What will be the average velocity and acceleration during the
course of the entire motion? (g = 9.8 m/s2).
Solution: (a) As slope of v – t graph gives acceleration, so
(i) At t = 1 s

3.6  0
a  1.8 m/s 2 ; i.e., lift is acc. up; so T = m(g + a)
2

i.e., T = 1500 (9.8 + 1.8) or T = 17400 N

ii) At t = 6 s

3.6  3.6
a  0 m/s 2 ; i.e., lift has no acc., ; so T = mg; i.e., T = 1500 × 9.8 or T = 14700 N
10  2

iii) At t = 11 s

0  3.6
a  1.8 m/s 2
12  10

i.e., lift is acc. down; so T = m(g – a)

i.e., T = 1500(9.8 – 1.8) or T = 12000 N

102
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

b) The displacement of the passenger is equal to the area under v-t curve, i.e.,

1 1
  2  0   3.6  10  2  3.6  12  10   3.6 = 3.6 [1 + 8 + 1] = 36 m
2 2

dispalcement 36
c) Average velocity  time taken  12  3 m/s

change in velocity 0  0
and Average acceleration  time taken

12
0

Example 17: A lift starts from rest with a constant upward acceleration. It moves 1.5 m in the first 0.4 s. A person
standing in the lift holds a packet of 2 kg by a string. Calculate the tension in the string during the motion.

Solution: Here, u = 0, s = 1.5 m, t = 0.4 s

1 1 1.5  2
1.5  0  a  0.4  ; a 
2
From s  ut  at ;  18.75 m/s 2
2

2 2 0.4  0.4

As the string is moving upwards with the acceleration  T = m(g + a) = 2(9.8 + 18.75) = 57.1 N

Example 18 : A man weighing 60 kg runs along the rails with a velocity of 18 km/h and jumps into a car of mass 1
quintal standing on the rails. Calculate the velocity with which the car will start travelling along the rails.

18  1000
Solution: Here m1 = 60 kg, v1 = 18 km/h  m/s = 5 m/s
60  60

m2 = 1 quintal = 100 kg, v2 = 0, v = ?

Applying the principle of conservation of linear momentum.

m1 v1 60  5
 m1  m 2  v  m1v1  m 2 v 2  m1v1 ; v   1.88 m/s
m1  m 2 60  100

Example 19 : Two blocks of mass 2.9 kg and 1.9 kg are suspended from a rigid support S by two inextensible
wires each of length 1 m. The upper wire has negligible mass and lower wire has uniform mass of 0.2 kg/m. The
whole system of blocks, wires and support have an upward acceleration of 0.2 m/s2. Acceleration due to gravity is
9.8 m/s2. Find the tension at (a) the mid point of lower wire (b) the mid point of upper wire.

103
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Solution : As the system is accelerated upwards, therefore, tension at any point is given by

T = m(g + a)

For the point A,

0.2
m  2.9   3.0  TA  m  g  a   3  9.8  0.2   30N
2

For the point B m = 2.9 + 0.2 + 1.9 = 0 = 5 kg

 TB = m(g + a) = 5(9.8 + 0.2) = 50 N

Example 20: A block of mass 25 kg is raised by a 50 kg man in two different ways as shown in fig. What is the
action on the floor by the man in the two classes? If the floor yields to a normal force of 700 N, which mode should
the man adopt to lift the block without the floor yielding.

Solution: The FBD for the two cases are shown in figure.
In Ist case, let the force exerted by the man on the floor is N1. Consider the forces inside the dotted box, we have
N1 = T + 50 g.
Block is to be raised without acceleration, so T = 25 g.

 N1  25 g  50 g  75g  75  9.8  735 N

In IInd case, let the force exerted by teh man on the floor in N2. Consider the forces inside the dotted box, we
have N 2  50g  T and T = 25 g.

104
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

N2 = 50 g – 25 g = 25 g = 25 × 9.8 = 245 N.
As the floor yield to a downward force of 700 N, so the man should adopt mode II.
Example 21: Figure shows a weighing machine kept in a lift is moving upwards with acceleration of 5 m/s2. A block
is kept on the weighing machine. Upper surface of block is attached with a spring balance. Reading shown by
weighing machine and spring balance is 15 kg and 45 kg respectively.

Answer the following questions. Assume that the weighing machine can measure wieght by having negligible
deformation due to block, while the spring balance requires larger expansion. (take g = 10 m/s2).
(i) Find the mass of the object in kg and the normal force acting on the block due to weighing machine?
(ii) Find the acceleration of the lift such that weighing machine shows its true weight?

Solution: (i)

T + N – Mg = Ma; 45 g + 15 g = M(g + a); 450 + 150 = M (10 + 5); M = 40 kg

Normal force is the reaction applied by weighing machine i.e., 15 × 10 = 150 N.

(ii)

T + N – Mg = Ma; 45 g + 40 g = 40 (g = a); 450 + 400 = 400 + 40 a

450 45
a  m / s2
40 4

105
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

LEVEL I [HOMEWORK]
1. An object moving at constant velocity in an inertial frame must:
A) have a net force acting on it B) have zero net force acting on it
C) not have any force of gravity on it D) stop after some time due to gravity
2. A ball is moving in a circle at fixed speed. Which of the following statement is TRUE?
A) There is no acceleration present
B) There must be only one force acting on it
C) Acceleration is present but has constant magnitude
D) Acceleration is present and acts tangent to the circle
3. A driver accelerates his car first at the rate of 1.8 m/s2 and then at the rate of 1.2 m/s2. The ratio of the two
forces exerted by the engine in the two cases will be
A) 1 : 2 B) 2 : 1 C) 2 : 3 D) 3 : 2
4. An object will continue to accelerate until
A) The resultant force begins to decrease B) The resultant force on it is zero
C) The velocity changes direction D) The resultant force on it is increased continuously
5. When a net force acts on an object, the object will be accelerated in the direction of the force with acceleration
proportional to
A) The force on the object B) The velocity of the object
C) The mass of the object D) The inertia of the object
6. An object of mass 6 kg is sliding on horizontal surface, with a uniform velocity of 8 m/s. Assuming force of
friction offered by the surface to be zero. The force required to maintain the motion of object with the same
uniform velocity is
A) 0 Newton B) 2 Newtons C) 8 Newtons D) 32 Newtons
7. A hammer of mass 300 g, moving at 40 m/s, strikes a nail. The nail stops the hammer in a very short time of
0.02 s. The force of the nail on the hammer is
A) 600 N B) 1200 N C) 2000 N D) 2500 N
8. The object shown below moves with constant velocity due to the action of two forces are acting on the
object. Considering negligible friction, the resultant force will be

7N 12 N

A) 3 N towards left B) 5 N towards right C) 10 N towards left D) 19 N towards right

9. When a bus starts suddenly from rest, the passengers sitting inside the bus move backwards. This illustrates
an example of
A) Newton First Law of Motion B) Newton Second Law of motion
C) Newtons Third Law of Motion D) None of these
10. The property of inertia is the largest in
A) a toy car B) a motorcycle C) a car D) a truck

106
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

11. An athlete runs some distance before taking a long jump because
A) gains energy to take him through long distance.
B) It helps him to apply large force
C) By running action and reaction forces increases
D) By running he gets larger inertia of motion
12. The velocity of a body of mass 20 kg decreases from 20 ms–1 to 5 ms–1 in a distance of 100 m. Force on the
body is
A) –27.5 N B) –47.5 N C) –37.5 N D) –67.5 N
13. A body of weight W is suspended from the ceiling of a room through a rope of weight R. The ceiling pulls the
rope by a force of

W  R
A) W B) R C) W + R D)
2

14. A truck carrying sand is moving on a smooth horizontal road with a uniform speed u. If a mass m of sand
leaks in time t from the bottom of the truck, the force needed to keep the truck moving at its uniform speed
u is given by:

mu mu mu 2

A) B) C) D) 0
t 2 t t
15. A ball of mass 0.1 kg is thrown against a wall. It strikes the wall normally with a velocity of 30 m/s and
rebounds from there with a velocity of 20 m/s. The impulse of the force exerted by the ball on the wall is
A) 0.5 Ns B) 50 Ns C) 1 Ns D) 5 Ns
16. Rate of change of momentum is equal to
A) Acceleration B) Work done C) Force D) Impulse
17. A canon recoils after firing due to
A) Conservation of energy B) Backward thrust of gases
C) Newton’s third law of motion D) Newton’s first law of motion
18. When the speed of a moving body is doubled
A) Its acceleration is doubled B) Its momentum is doubled
C) Its kinetic energy is doubled D) Its potential energy is doubled
19. A bullet of mass 40 gm is fired from a gun of mass 8 kg with a velocity of 800 m/s, calculate the recoil velocity
of gun
A) 1 m/s B) –1 m/s C) 2 m/s D) – 4 m/s

107
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. A block of mass 4 kg is placed on a rough horizontal plane. A time dependent force F = Kt2 acts on a block,
where k = 2Ns–2, co-efficient of friction = 0.8. Force of friction between the block and the plane at t = 2 S is
...........
A) 32 N B) 4 N C) 2 N D) 8 N
1
21. An ice cart of mass 60 kg rests on a horizontal snow patch with coefficient of static friction . Assuming that
3
there is no vertical acceleration, find the magnitude of the maximum horizontal force required to move the ice
cart. (g = 9.8 ms–2).
A) 100 N B) 110 N C) 209 N D) 196 N
22. Brakes of a very small contact area are not used, although friction is independent of area. This is because
friction:
A) Depends on the nature of the material B) Causes wear and tear
C) Resists motion D) Sliding friction operates in this case
LEVEL II
1. A force (F) varies with time (t) as shown in figure. Average force over a complete cycle is:

F0 F0
A) Zero B) C) D) 2F0
2 

1
The motion of a particle of a mass m is describe by y  ut  gt . Find the force acting on the particle.
2
2.
2
A) F = ma B) F = mg C) F = 0 D) None of these

3. Three forces are acting simultaneously on a particle moving with velocity v . These forces are represented in
magnitude and direction by the three sides of a triangle ABC. The particle will now move with velocity ...........
C

A B
A) Less than v
B) greater than v

C) v in the direction of the largest force BC

D) v remaining unchanged

108
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

4. A balloon has a mass of 10 g in air. The air escapes from the balloon at a uniform rate with a velocity of 5 cm/s
and the balloon shrinks completely in 2.5 sec. Calculate the average force acting on the balloon.
A) 20 dyne B) 5 dyne C) 0 dyne D) 10 dyne
5. An object of mass 10 kg, moves at a constant speed of 10 ms–1. A constant force, that acts for 4 s on the
object, gives it a speed of 2 ms–1 in opposite direction. The force acting on the object is
A) – 3 N B) –30 N C) 3 N D) 30 N
6. A ball of mass 0.2 kg is thrown vertically upwards by applying a force by hand. If the hand moves 0.2 m
while applying the force and the ball goes upto 2 m height further, find the magnitude of the force. Consider
g = 10 m/s2.
A) 22 N B) 4 N C) 16 N D) 20 N
7. The average force necessary to stop a hammer with 25 NS momentum in 0.04 sec is ...........N.
A) 625 B) 125 C) 50 D) 25
8. A 0.5 kg ball moving with a speed of 12 ms–1 strikes a hard wall at an angle of 30o with the wall. It is reflected
with the same speed and at the same angle. If the ball is in contact with the wall for 0.25 s the average force
acting on the wall is
A) 96 N B) 48 N C) 24 N D) 12 N
9. A rubber ball of mass 0.5 kg is dropped vertically on the ground and hits the ground with a speed of 10 m/s.
The ball rebounds on the ground with a speed of 5 m/s. Calculate the impulse acting on the ball during the
contact with the ground.
A) 7.5 kg m/s B) –7.5 kg m/s C) 2.5 kg m/s D) –2.5 kg m/s
10. Figure showing the direction and magnitude of forces acting. Calculate the resulting force on the object.

A) 0 N B) 10 N C) 10 N upward D) 10 N downward

11. Two skaters A and B of masses 50 and 70 kg respectively, stand facing each other, 6 metres apart on a
horizontal smooth surface. They pull a rope stretched between them. How far has each moved when they
meet?
A) Both have moved 3 m B) A moves 4 m and B moves 2 m
C) A moves 2.5 m and B moves 3.5 m D) A moves 3.5 m and B moves 2.5 m

109
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

12. A 10 kg object at rest explodes into four pieces. Each of the three pieces has a mass of 2.0 kg, and the pieces
travel due south, due east, and due west, respectively, at 3.0 m/s. What is the magnitude of the velocity of the
remaining piece?
A) 1.0 m/s B) 1.5 m/s C) 3.0 m/s D) 4.5 m/s
13. A forest officer has a machine gun that fires 50 g bullets with a velocity of 150 m/s. An 90 kg lion springs at him
with a velocity of 10 m/s. How many bullets must the officer fire in order to stop the lion in its tract?
A) 120 B) 60 C) 27 D) 75
14. A 5 kg ball moving at 8 m/s towards south, strikes a 2 kg ball moving at 3 m/s towards south. If the velocity
of the 2 kg ball after the collision is 5 m/s south, what is the final velocity of the 5 kg ball?
A) 11.2 m/s south B) 9.2 m/s north C) 7.2 m/s south D) 7.2 m/s north
15. A body of mass 6 kg is hanging from another body of mass 10 kg as shown in figure. The combination is being
pulled up by a string with an acceleration of 2 ms–2, the tension T1 is (g = 10 ms–2)

T1
10 kg

T2 a

6 kg

A) 240 N B) 150 N C) 220 N D) 192 N

16. A person standing on the floor of a lift drops a coin. The coin reaches the floor of the lift in time t1 if the lift is
stationary and the time t2 if it is accelerated in upward direction. Then
A) t1 = t2 B) t1 < t2 C) t1 > t2 D) Cannot say anything

Mg
17. With what acceleration (a) should a box descend so that a block of mass M placed in it exerts a force on
4
the floor of the box?

4g 3g g
A) B) C) D) 3 g
3 4 4
18. A rope which can withstand a maximum tension of 400 N hangs from a tree. If a monkey of mass 30 kg climbs
on the rope in which of the following cases-will the rope break? (take g = 10 ms–2 and neglect the mass of
rope)
A) When the monkey climbs with constant speed of 5ms–1
B) When the monkey climbs with constant acceleration of 2ms–1
C) When the monkey climbs with constant acceleration of 5 ms–2
D) When the monkey climbs with the constant speed of 12 ms–1
19. A system is accelerated upward with acceleration 5 g. The apparent weight of a body of mass m in the system is
A) 1 mg N B) 5 mg N C) 6 mg N D) 8 mg N
110
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

20. A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block stationary against a wall. The coefficient of friction
between the block and the wall is 0.2. The weight of the block is:

10 N

A) 20 N B) 50 N C) 100 N D) 2 N
21. If a person with a spring balance and a body hanging from it goes up and up in an aeroplane, then the reading
of the weight of the body as indicated by the spring balance will:
A) go on increasing B) go on decreasing
C) first increases and then decreases D) remain the same
22. Two masses 5 kg and 3 kg are suspended from the ends of an unstretchable light string passing over a
frictionless pulley. When the masses are released, the pressure on the pulley is:
A) 8 kgf B) 2 kgf C) 15 kgf D) 7.5 kgf
23. The coefficient of the friction between two surfaces is   0.8 . The tension in the string shown in the figure is:

1) 0 N 2) 6 N 3) 4 N 4) 8 N
24. Two blocks of masses m and 2 m are connected by a light string passing over a frictionless pulley. As shown
in the figure, the mass m is placed on a smooth inclined plane of inclination 30o and 2m hangs vertically. If the
system is released, the blocks move with an acceleration equal to:

g g g
A) B) C) D) g
4 3 2

111
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

25. The apparent weight of a person inside a life is w1 when lift moves up with a certain acceleration and is w2
when lift moves down with same acceleration. The weight of the person when lift moves up with constant
speed is :

w1  w 2 w1  w 2
A) B) C) 2w1 D) 2w2
2 2
26. Three blocks A, B and C of masses 4 kg, 2 kg and 1 kg rsepectively, are in contact on a frictionless surface
as shown in figure. If a force of 14 N is applied on the 4 kg block, then the contact force between A and B
is

A) 6 N B) 8 N C) 18 N D) 2 N

LEVEL III
More than one correct.
1. The coefficient of friction between the wheels of a car and the ground is 0.5. The car starts from rest and moves
along a perfectly horizontal road. If g = 10 ms–2. the car:
A) Can acquire a maximum acceleration of 5 m/s2 without slipping
B) Can attain a speed of 20 m/s in a minimum distance of 40 m
C) Can go up to a speed of 100 m/s in 10 s.
D) After acquiring a speed of 50 m/s, can come to rest, with the engine shut off and brakes not applied, at a
time of 10 s.
2. When a force is applied to a moving body.
A) Both momentum and KE change B) Neither momentum nor KE changes
C) KE changes, but not the momentum D) Momentum changes, but not the KE
3. In which of the following cases, net force is zero?
A) a drop of rain falling down with terminal velocity
B) a cork of mass 5 gram floating on water
C) a car moving with constant speed on a rough road
D) a kite held stationary in air
4. Consider a vehicle going on a horizontal road towards east. Neglect any force by the air. The frictional force
on the vehicle by the road is
A) zero if vehicle is moving with a uniform speed B) towards east if the vehicle is accelerating
C) towards east always D) towards west always

112
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Comprehension type.
Passage I
Two bodies A and B of masses m and 2 m respectively are moving with equal linear momenta. They are
subjected to the same retarding force.
x1
5. If x1 and x2 are the respective distances moved by them before stopping, then x is
2

1
A) B) 1 C) 2 D) 2
2
t1
6. If t1 and t2 are the respective times taken by them to stop, then t is
2

1 1
A) 1 B) 2 C) D)
2 4
a1
7. If a1 and a2 are their respective decelerations, then a is
2

1
A) 1 B) 2 C) 2 D)
2
Matrix Match.
8. Match the examples mentioned in column I with their logic in column II.

Column I Column II
A) Fireman and his water hose p) Frictional force
B) When a car accelerates, you feel like you are q) Inelastic collision
pushed back into the chair
C) During winters, you rub your hands together to r) Conservation of linear
warm your hands momentum
D) Two billiard balls colliding on a pool table s) Law of inertia

9. Match the following.

Column I Column II
A) Static friction p) less than sliding friction
B) Limiting friction q) less than limiting friction
C) Dynamic friction r) self adjusting force
D) Rolling friction s) maximum value of static friction

Integer type .
10. An explosion breaks a rock into three parts in a horizontal plane. Two of them go off at right angles to each
other. The first part of mass 1 kg moves with a speed of 12 ms–1 and the second part of mass 2 kg moves with
8 ms–1 speed. If the third part flies off with 4 ms–1 speed, then its mass is

113
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. A particle of mass 3 kg is moving with a velocity of 5 m/s along a straight line. A force of 12 N is applied for
3 second on the particle in a direction perpendicular to its direction of motion. The magnitude of velocity of the
particle at the end of 3 second is
12. A string is tied on a pole P fitted on the ground and slides on the tree branch T. The pole can tolerate a force
of 490 N. A man of 70 kg weight can safely climb down the rope with an acceleration of

Reasoning Type.
Each question contains Statement I and Statement II. Of these Statements, mark correct choice if
A) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
B) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
13. Statement I : A table cloth covers a table. Some dishes are kept on it. The cloth can be pulled out without
dislodging the dishes from the table.
Statement II : For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction.
14. Statement I : An orange falling from a certain height hits the ground, it exerts a force equal to the rate of
change of momentum.
Statement II : The ground does not move because the action and reaction forces, being equal and opposite,
cancel each other.
15. Statement I : It is difficult to move a bike with its brakes on.
Statement II : Rolling friction is converted into sliding friction, which is comparatively larger.
NTSE PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS
1. A retarding force of 150 N is applied to a body of mass 50 kg which is moving with a speed of 30 m/s. The
time taken by the body to come to rest is
A) 20 seconds B) 30 seconds C) 5 seconds D) 10 seconds
2. The brakes applied to a car produce an acceleration of 8 m/s2 in the opposite direction to the motion. If the
car takes 3 seconds to stop after the application of brakes, the distance it travels during the time will be
A) 30 m B) 36 m C) 25 m D) 40 m
3. A bullet of mass 10 gm moving with 100 m/s is embedded in a block of 1 kg which is initially in rest. The final
velocity of the system will be
A) 1 m/s B) 1.5 m/s C) 0.5 m/s D) 2 m/s
4. A bomb of mass 9 kg initially at rest explodes into two pieces of masses 3 kg and 6 kg. If the kinetic energy
of 3 kg mass is 216 J, then the velocity of 6 kg mass will be
A) 4 m/s B) 3 m/s C) 2 m/s D) 6 m/s
114
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

CHAPTER - 5
WORK, ENERGY AND POWER

Introduction
In daily life, work implies any activity in which muscular or mental effort is exerted. For example, we say that
we are doing work while, (i) reading a book, (ii) cooking the food, (iii) walking on a level road with a box on our
head (iv) pushing a wall of a house but fails to do so. In all these cases, either mental or a physical activity is
involved. In physics, work has a special meaning. Work is done only when the force acting on a body produces
motion in it in the direction of force (or in the direction of component of force). Thus a boy pushing the wall is doing
no work from physics’ point of view. It is because the force exerted by the boy is not producing motion of the wall.
The speed at which work can be done is an indication of the power of the body doing work. For example, a boy
may carry a suitcase upstairs in 3 minutes while a man may do it in 1 minute. Obviously, the power of the man is more
than the power of the boy. Thus, time factor is important for power. A body which has the capacity to do work is
said to possess energy. The greater the capacity of a body to do work, the greater the energy it has. Thus work,
energy and the power are related to each other.
WORK
Work is said to be done if the point of application of the force is displaced in the direction of force.
Conditions which must be satisfied for the work done are:
(i) A force must act on the body.
(ii) The body must be displaced from one position to another position.
Definition
Work is said to be done by a force on a body or an object if the force applied causes a displacement in the
body or object.
Eg: Work is done, when a box is dragged on the floor from one position to another. In this case, force is on the box
to drag it on the floor and the box moves through a certain distance between one position to another position.
(a) Measurement of work
Work is measured by the product of force and the displacement in the direction of force. Work is a scalar
quantity.
Work = Force × displacement in the direction of force
W  F  d cos   ------- (i)

d cos 

d

115
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

or work done = displacement × force in the direction of displacement.

W  d  Fcos   --------- (ii)

 F cos 
d

Special cases:
Case I : If   0o , then
F d

From equation (i)

W  Fd cos   Fd cos 0o  cos 0o  1
So, W = Fd (maximum)
When force and displacement are in same direction then work done will be maximum.
Case II : When   90o , then - From equation (i)

W  Fd cos 90o
 cos 90o  0
So, W = 0

o
90
d

When force and displacement are perpendicular to each other then work done will be zero.
Eg: If a body is moving in the horizontal direction then work done by the force of gravity will be zero.
d
o
90

mg

Eg: If a body is moving on a circular path then work done by the centripetal force will be zero, because the
direction of centripetal force is towards the centre of the circle and displacement will be along the tangent.
d
o
90
O

116
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Case III :
If   180o
then from equation (i)
W = Fd cos 180o  cos180o  1
then, W = – Fd
When the force and displacement are in opposite directions then work done will be negative.
Eg: When a spring is compressed then the force applied by the spring and the displacement will be in opposite
directions, so work done by the spring will be negative.
When the spring is stretched then the work done by the spring will also be negative.

Normal spring
d
Compressed
spring
F
Stretched spring d
F

Work done by Gravity : When a body of mass m is lifted upward by a force, F = mg has to be applied upwards.
Work done by the force of gravity will be negative.
Work done, W = –mgh.

h
F

mg

(b) Absolute units of work done:

Work done, W= Fd
In C.G.S. system the unit of work done is dyne × cm = erg.
Definition of 1 erg:
When F = 1 dyne and d = 1 cm.
then, W = 1 × 1 = 1 erg.
If one dyne force is applied on a body and displacement in the body is 1 cm in the direction of force, then work
done will be one erg.
S.I. unit of work done is newton × metre = joule.
Definition of 1 joule:
If F = 1 N and d = 1 m.
then, W = 1 × 1 = 1 joule (J)
If a force of 1 Newton is applied on a body and displacement in the body is 1 m in the direction of force then
117
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

work done will be 1 joule.

Relation between joule and erg:
1 joule = 1 N × 1 m = 105 dyne × 102 cm = 107 dyne cm = 107 erg
(c) Gravitational unit of work
gm wt - cm and kg wt - m
If unit gravitational force displaces the body through unit distance in the direction of force, the work will have
gravitational unit.
(i) In CGS system, gravitational unit of work is gram-weight-centimeter (g wt cm).
Since W = FS
 1 g wt cm = 1 g wt × 1 cm = 981 dyne × 1 cm
1 g wt cm = 981 erg.
Thus 1 g-wt-cm of work is done when the force of 1g-wt displaces a body through 1 cm in its direction.
(ii) In S.I. system, gravitational unit of work is kilogram weight meter (kg wt m)
1 kg wt m = 1 kg wt × 1 m = 9.81 N × 1 m
1 kg wt m = 9.81 J
Thus, 1 kg wt m of work is done when a force of 1 kg-wt displaces a body through 1 m in its direction.
Conditions for work done to be zero:
(i) If F = 0 then work done, W = 0
Eg: A student revising his notes by memory without moving his limbs is doing no physical work.
A meditating saint is doing no physical work though keeps sitting for hours.
(ii) If displacement, d = 0 then work done, W = 0.
Eg: A foolish labour trying to displace a building has done no work though he may spend the whole day.
(d) Types of work:
(A) Positive work done

When the angle between force and the displacement is acute    90o  , then work done will be positive

because one component of force  Fcos   is in the direction of displacement so work done by this component will

be positive  Fd cos   . Work done by the vertical component (i.e.,  Fsin   will be zero. ( the angle between
Fsin  and displacement is 90o) so net work done will be positive.
F sin 

 F cos 
d

(i) In lifting a weight upward by applying an upward force, the work done by the applied force will be positive.
(ii) In stretching a spring, the work done by the external force will be positive.
(B) Negative work done :

118
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

When the angle between the force and the displacement is obtuse,    90o  , then work done will be negative

because work done by the horizontal component of force (i.e., Fcos  ) is negative  Fd cos   and the work done

by the vertical component  Fsin   will be zero, so network done will be negative.

F sin 
F


F cos(180 – ) = – F cos 
d displacement

Illustrations
Example 1 : A porter lifts a luggage of 15 kg from the ground and put it on his head, 1.5 m above the ground.
Calculate the work done by him on the luggage. (take g = 10 m/s2)
Solution: Mass of luggage, m = 15 kg
displacement, d = 1.5 m
acceleration due to gravity, g = 10 m/s2
work done, W = Fd = mgd
W = 15 × 10 × 1.5 = 225 J
Example 2 : A force of 10 N displaces a body by 5 m, the angle between force and displacement is 60o, then find
the work done.
Solution: Force, F = 10 N,
displacement, d = 5 m,
angle between force and displacement,   60o
work done, W  Fd cos   10  5  cos 60o ,
1
 cos 60o 
2
1
then, W  10  5   W  25 J
2
Example 3 : A bus of mass 10,000 kg is moving with a velocity 60 km/h. Calculate the work done to stop the bus.
5
Solution: m = 10,000 kg, u = 60 km/h = 60  m/s  16.67 m/s
18
v = 0.
1 1 1
Work done  mv  mu  0   10000  16.67  1389444.5 N
2 2 2

2 2 2
Negative sign shows that the work done is against the direction motion of the bus.
ENERGY
When a man does a work, he feels tired. He feels that he has lost energy, which he must regain to work more.
119
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Definition : Capacity of doing work or total work done is called the energy.
Units of energy: Since energy is the capacity to do work, then C.G.S. unit of energy is erg and S.I. unit of energy
is joule.
Note: The energy consumed is measured in kWh.
kilo watt × hour (kWh) is commercial unit of energy.
1 kWh = 1000 watt × 60 × 60 sec. = 3.6 × 106 watt × sec
1 kWh = 3.6 × 106 J
Different forms of Energy
(i) Heat energy:
When we burn coal, wood or gas, heat energy is released. Steam possess heat energy that is why in a steam
engine, the heat energy of steam is used to get the work done. Sun also radiates heat energy.
(ii) Light energy:
It is a form of energy which gives us the sensation of vision. Natural source of light is the sun. An electric bulb
also emits light energy.
(iii) Sound energy:
The energy emitted by a vibrating wire, tuning fork, vibrating membrane etc., that can be sensed by human ears
is called sound energy.
Eg. whistle, flute, sitar, all emits sound energy when they are made to vibrate.
(iv) Magnetic energy :
A magnet also possess energy known as magnetic energy. When a current is passed through a coil, it stores
magnetic energy.
(v) Electrical energy:
Electrical energy is a form of energy resulting from the flow of electric charges. Electric energy may be either
potential or kinetic. It is produced due to the force between charges.
Eg. A charged body possess electrical energy.
(vi) Chemical energy:
Chemical energy is energy stored in the bonds of chemical compounds. This energy is released when a chemical
reaction taken place. Petroleum, wood, chemical battery etc. store chemical energy. Food also provide chemical
energy.
(vii) Solar energy:
The energy radiated by the sun is solar energy. Sun is a natural source of energy.
(viii) Nuclear energy:
When a heavier nucleus breaks into lighter nuclei or two lighter nuclei combine to form heavier nucleus, nuclear
energy is released. The mass that disappears will appear as energy during reactions. Splitting of nucleus is
nuclear fission and combining in nuclear fusion.
(ix) Mechanical energy:
the energy possessed by a body due to its state of rest or state of motion is called mechanical energy. Mechanical
energy is of the type KE and PE.
KINETIC ENERGY
The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its motion is called kinetic energy.

120
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

A flying cannon ball does work on a brick wall that it strikes down; a moving hammer does work on a nail that
it strikes. In either case, the moving object exerts a force on a second object and moves it through a distance. An
object in motion has the ability to do work and thus possesses energy. The energy of a moving object is called kinetic
energy.
Expression for kinetic energy
Consider a body of mass m moving in a straight line with velocity v. Suppose initially the body is at rest
 i.e., v0  0  . Let a constant horizontal force F be applied to the body till it attains the velocity v. That means
v t  vfinal  v . If s is the distance travelled during this time, then work done by the force on the body is,
W = Fs
If a is the constant acceleration produced then according to Newton’s second law F = ma.
 W  mas -------- (i)

Now, v 2  v 02  2as or v 2  02  2as

v2
s  ----------(ii)
2a
Now from (i) and (ii), we get:
v2 1
 W  ma  mv 2
2a 2
v0 = 0 vt = v
F F

s
Since W = Kinetic energy gained by the body.
1
 Kinetic energy K  mv 2
2
Note that kinetic energy of the moving body is directly proportional to the mass and square of velocity of the
body. Clearly, the kinetic energy of a body at rest is zero. The following points may be noted:
(i) Kinetic energy like work is a scalar quantity. The kinetic energy of a moving body depends on its speed
(magnitude of velocity) but not on the direction in which it is moving.
(ii) Since m and v2 both are positive, kinetic energy is always positive.
(iii) The kinetic energy of a body may be expressed in terms of the magnitude of its momentum (p = mv).
 mv 
2
1
K  mv 2 
2 2m
p2
K  ----------(iii)
2m
This equation relates K.E. and linear momentum.
1
If momentum p is constant, then K  . The graph between K and m for this situation is shown in figure (a).
m

121
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

If K is constant, then p  m . The graph between p and m for this situation is shown in figure (b). If m is constant,
then p  K . The graph between K and p for this situation is shown in figure (c).

K p = constant p K = constant K m = constant

O O O
m m p
(a) (b) (c)
Example 4 : What is the work to be done to increase the velocity of a car from 30 km/h to 60 km/h. If mass of the
car is 1500 kg.
Solution : Mass of car, m = 1500 kg.
Initial velocity, u = 30 km/h = 8.323 m/s.
Final velocity, v = 60 km/h = 16.67 m/s
1 1
Work done, W  mv 2  mu 2
2 2
1
W   1500 16.67    8.33   = 750 (277.9 – 69.4)
2 2

2  
W = 750 × 208.5 = 156375 J
W = 1.56 × 105 J
Example 5 : A bullet is fired from a gun. What will be the ratio of kinetic energy of bullet and gun?
Solution :When a bullet is fired from a gun, the gun has same backward momentum, while the bullet has a forward
momentum.
1
 K
m
K.E. of bullet mass of gun M
   M  m 
K.E. of gun mass of bullet m
So, bullet has more kinetic energy than that of the gun.
Example 6 : A loaded truck and a car have same kinetic energy, which will have more momentum?
Solution : Kinetic energy of truck and car is same.
P m

momentum of truck mass of truck M

So,    M  m 
momentum of car mass of car m
So, truck has more momentum than that of the car.
Example 7 : Which would have a greater effect on the kinetic energy of an object doubling the mass or doubling the
velocity?

122
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

1
Solution : From formula, K.E. = mv 2
2
K.E.  m
and K.E.  v 2
When mass is doubled, kinetic energy becomes double.
When velocity is doubled, kinetic energy becomes four times.
So, doubling of velocity will have a greater effect on the kinetic energy.
Example 8 : A body of mass 5 kg initially at rest is subjected to a force of 20 N. Find the KE acquired by the body
at the end of 10 s.
F 20
Solution: m = 5 kg, F = 20 N, a    4 m/s 2
m 5
At the end of 10 s, the velocity v = u + at = 0 + 4 × 10 = 40 m/s.
1 2 1
KE acquired by the body = mv   5  402  4000J
2 2
Example 9 : A box is pushed through 4.0 m across a floor offering 100 N resistance. How much work is done by
the (i) Applied force (ii) Resisting force.
Solution: Here S = 4.0 m, F = 100 N, W = ?
Worked done by applied force
W  FScos 0  100  4  1  400 J
Work done by resistance force
W  FScos180o  100  4   1  400 J
POTENTIAL ENERGY
When a child lifts a football from the ground and place it on the top of a table, some work is done on the ball.
Now, if this football falls down from the top of the table and hits another football lying on the ground, then the football
lying on the ground is displaced from its position. This simple activity shows that a falling football is able to do work.
“We know, anything capable of doing work possess energy.” Therefore a football placed on the table also
possess energy. This energy of the football lying on the top of the table is known as potential energy. The work done
by the child to raise it to the top of the table from the ground is stored as energy. This stored energy is known as
potential energy.
(a) Definition of Potential Energy
The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its position or shape or configuration is known as potential
energy.
(b) Examples:
(i) Water stored in a dam has potential energy due to its position.
(ii) A stone lying on the top of a hill or a mountain has potential energy due to its position.
(iii) A stretched or a compressed spring has potential energy due to its shape. When spring is stretched or
compressed, work is done on it. This work done is stored in as potential energy of the stretched or
compressed spring.
(iv) A wound spring of a watch has potential energy due to its shape.

123
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(v) A stretched bow and arrow has potential energy due to its shape.
(c) Gravitational and Elastic Potential Energy:
(i) Gravitational potential energy:
The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its position (i.e., height above the surface of the earth) is
known as gravitational potential energy.
(ii) Elastic potential energy
The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its deformed shape (i.e., either stretched or compressed) is
known as elastic potential energy.
(d) Expression for Potential Energy of a Body at a Certain Height
The energy possessed by a body due to its position in the gravitational field of the earth is called gravitational
potential energy.
Consider a block of mass m which is to be raised to a height ‘h’. The force required to lift the block must be
equal to the gravitational force. (i.e. weight of the block). Thus, Fg = mg. Let the applied force on the block be F =
mg and the block is raised to the height h as shown in the figure.
Work done by the applied force F is given by

W = Fh cos 0o  cos 0 o  1 or W = Fh = mgh

h
F

mg

Now, work done by the gravitational force on the block,

W  Fg h cos180o
 
[   180o between Fg and h ]

or Wg   Fg h   mgh [ Fg  mg]

Work done against the gravitational force on the block is known as gravitational potential energy.

U g    mgh   mgh

(e) Gravitational force is conservative force: Gravitational potential energy depends upon the difference in
heights of the initial position and final position of a body but is independent of the path followed by the body while
going from initial position to final position.

124
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

B B
h2
h Path I Path II
A1 A2 h
h1
A A

Ground Ground
(a) (b)

Consider a ball of mass m raised through a height h from position A to position B along path I. Then gravitational
potential energy of the ball at height h p = mgh -------- (i)

Now let the ball is raised through height h1, from position A to position A1. Then gravitational potential energy
of the ball at height h1. p1 = mgh1 -------- (ii)

When the ball is taken from position A1 to position A2, then no work is done against gravity because the force
of gravity acts perpendicular to the displacement of the ball. Thus, gravitational potential energy of the ball at position
A1 and at position A2 is same. Hence, there is no change in gravitational potential energy of the ball in going from
position A1 to position. A2.

Now when the ball is raised through a height h2 from position A2 to position B, then the gravitational potential
energy of the ball at height h2, p 2  mgh 2 ---------(iii)

Therefore, the total gravitational potential energy of the ball at position B  p1  p 2

 mgh1  mgh 2  mg  h1  h 2   mgh  p -------- (iv)

  h1  h 2   h 

Thus, from equation (i) and (iv), we conclude that

(i) The gravitational potential energy of a body depends upon the difference in height (h) of the initial and final
positions of the body.

(ii) The gravitational potential energy of the body does not depend upon the path followed by the body going
from initial to final positions.

POTENTIAL ENERGY OF A SPRING

Consider an elastic spring of negligible mass with its one end attached to a rigid support. Its other end is
attached to a block of mass m which can slide over a smooth horizontal surface. The position x = 0 is the equilibrium
position, as shown in figure (a). When the spring is stretched (fig. b) or compressed (fig. c) by pulling or pushing the
block, a spring force Fs begins to act in the spring towards the equilibrium position.

125
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Fs = 0
x=0
(a)
x=0 x
Fs is negative
x is positive
(b)
x x

Fs Fs is positive
(c) x is positive

x
x
According to Hooke’s law, the spring force Fs is proportional to the displacement of block from the equilibrium
position, i.e.,
Fs  x or Fs   kx
The proportionality constant k is called spring constant. Its SI unit is Nm–1. The spring is stiff if k is large and
soft if k is small. The negative sign shows Fs acts in the opposite direction of x.
(a) PE of an Elastic Stretched Spring by Graphical Method.
Figure above shows the plot of spring force Fs versus displacement x of a block attached to the free end of the
spring.

Fs
Fs
=–
kx
xm
0 B x
kx 2m
Area 
2
A

Plot of Fs versus x

According to Hooke’s law, the spring force of an extension xm is

Fs = –k xm
The work done by the spring force for an extension xm is
1
Ws  Area of OBA  AB  OB
2
1 1 1
 Fs  x m    k x m   x m   k x m2
2 2 2

126
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

In order to stretch the spring slowly, an external force F equal to and opposite to Fs has to be applied. So work
done by the external force F is
1
W   Ws  k x m2
2
This work done is stored as the P.E. of the spring.
1 2
U k xm
2
INTERCONVERSION OF POTENTIAL AND KINETIC ENERGY
(i) For a freely falling body, potential energy changes into kinetic energy
Let a body of mass m be at rest at a point at height h from the ground.
At highest point:
Potential energy of the body U1 = mgh

Kinetic energy of the body K1 = 0  u  0

As the body falls freely, it gains velocity and reduces height. Let the body have velocity v when it reaches the
ground.
At lowest point:

Potential energy of the body, U2 = 0  h  0

1
Kinetic energy of the body, K 2  mv 2
2
From third equation of motion,
v 2  u 2  2gh

We have, v2  2gh  u  0
1 1
Hence, final kinetic energy = mv 2  m  2gh 
2 2
= mgh = Initial potential energy.
(ii) For an upward projected body, kinetic energy changes into potential energy.
Let a body of mass m be projected upward with a velocity u from a point on the ground.
At the lowest point :
1
Kinetic energy of the body, K1  mu 2
2
Potential energy of the body, U2 = 0
As the body rises upward, it gains height and loses velocity.
Let the body reach highest point at height h where the velocity becomes zero.

127
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

At highest point:
Kinetic energy of the body, K2 = 0
Potential energy of the body U2 = mgh
From third equation of motion, v 2  u 2  2gh

We have, 0  u 2  2gh
( v = 0 and g is negative for upward motion)
or u2 = 2gh

u2
Hence, final P.E. = mgh = m.
2
1
P.E. = mu 2  Initial K.E.
2
SOME OTHER EXAMPLES OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY
(ii) Mechanical energy of a freely falling body:
Let a body of mass m at rest at a height h from the earth’s surface, when it starts falling, after a distance x (point
B) its velocity becomes v and at earth’s surface its velocity is v'.
Mechanical energy of the body:
At point A :
EA = Kinetic energy + Potential energy
EA = m(0)2 + mgh
A

x
h
B
(h–x)
C
GROUND

EA = mgh -------- (i)

At point B:
1
EB  mv 2  mg  h  x  ----------(ii)
2
From third equation of motion at points A and B
v 2  u 2  2gx  u0
On putting the value of v2 in equation (i)
1
EB  m  2gh   mgh  mgx
2
E B  mgx  mgh  mgx

128
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

EB = mgh -------- (iii)

At point C:
1
m  v   mg  0
2
Ec 
2

1
m  v  --------- (iv)
2
Ec 
2
From third equation of motion at points A and C.

 v   u 2  2gh  u  0
2

 v 
2
So,  2gh

On putting the value of  v  in equation (iv)

2

1
Ec  m  2gh 
2

or E c  mgh --------- (v)

From equation (i), (iii) and (v)
E A  E B  EC
Hence, the mechanical energy of a freely falling body will be constant.
i.e., Total energy of the body during free fall, remains constant at all positions. The form of energy, however
keeps on changing. At point A, energy is entirely potential energy and at point C, it is entirely kinetic energy. In
between A and C, energy is partially potential and partially kinetic. This variation of energy is shown in figure. Total
mechanical energy stays constant (mgh) throughout.
Thus in an isolated system, where only conservative forces cause energy changes, the kinetic energy and
potential energy can change, but the mechanical energy of the system (which is the sum of kinetic energy and
potential energy) cannot change. We can, therefore, equate the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy at one
instant to the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy at another instant without considering intermediate states.
TE
ENERGY

PE KE

A POSITION C

Mechanical energy and its conservation

The mechanical energy (E) of a body in the sum of KE and P.E. of the body
i.e., E = K + V
i.e., Total mechanical energy of a system is considered if the forces, doing work on the system are conservative.

129
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

This is the principle of conservation of Mechanical Energy.

Principle of conservation of energy
When some non conservative forces are involved in a system, a part of the ME may be changed to other forms
of energy, such as heat, light, sound etc.  The principle of conservation of energy states that the total energy of an
isolated system remains constant, or in other words energy cannot be created or destroyed, it can be transformed
from one form to another, so that total energy of the system remains constant.
WORK-ENERGY THEOREM
This theorem states that the work done by all the forces acting on a body is equal to the change in the kinetic
energy of the body.
Consider a body of mass m moving with a velocity u. Let a force F be applied on the body, so that it is
accelerated with an acceleration ‘a’.
Then, F = ma
If s be the distance travelled by the body during its accelerated motion, then the work done by the force F is
given by W = Fs = mas,
Since (F = ma) ----------- (i)
Let the body acquires a velocity v after travelling a distance s, then v 2  u 2  2as , we have

v2  u 2
a ------- (ii)
2s
Put this value in equation, we get
 v2  u 2  1 1
W  m   s  mv  mu --------- (iii)
2 2

 2s  2 2

1 1
Here mv 2  Final K.E. and mu 2  Initial KE
2 2

The difference between the final and initial kinetic energies is the change in K.E. of the body   K.E.

 W  change in K.E.    K.E.

This is known as work-energy theorem.
Now as W = F.s. so (iii) can be written as
1 1
mv 2  mu 2
F 2 2 -------- (iv)
s
Equation (iv) gives us the relationship between force and energy.
Example 10 : A man of mass 70 kg climbs from a hill station A to another hill station B. The height of hill station A
is 1200 m above sea level and B is 1800 m above sea level. Calculate the work done in going from A to B.
Solution: h = 1800 – 1200 = 600 m, m = 70 kg

130
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Work done = Change in PE = mgh = 70 × 10 × 600 = 4.2 × 105 J

Example 11 : An object is dropped from a height 10 m. If the energy of the object reduces by 40% after striking
ground. How much height can the object bounce back.

Solution: PE of the object = mgh = mg × 10

After striking ground energy of the object = 60% (10 mg) = 6 mg

Due to this energy the object is taken to a height h' and the PE = mgh' = 6 mg

 h  6 m

Example 12 : A rubber ball falls on a floor from a height of 19.6 m. Calculate the velocity with which it strikes the
ground. To what height will the ball rebound if it loses 25% of its energy on striking the ground?
Solution: Here h1 = 19.6 m. v1 = ?
Loss of energy = 25%, h2 = ?
On striking the floor KE = PE.

1
mv12  mgh1
2

v1  2gh1  2  9.8  19.6  19.6 m/s

75
As the body loses 25% of its energy, final energy E 2  of its initial energy..
100

75
i.e., mgh   mgh1 
100

3 3
h2  h1   19.6  14.7 m
4 4
POWER

The amount of work done in unit time is called power. The rate of doing work is called power. The amount of
power of a body depends upon,

(i) The magnitude of the work and

(ii) The time taken by the body to do the work.

so, by knowing the work and time, we can measure power.

The amount of power is the ratio of work and time.

Work
Formula : Power =
Time
131
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Unit:

S.I. unit of power is watt (W)

One watt is a smaller unit, higher units used are

1 K ilowatt (kW ) = 103 watt

1 Megawatt (MW) = 106 watt

1 Gigawatt (GW) = 109 W

commercial unit of power is horse power.

1 horse power (1 H.P.) = 746 watt (W)

Different expression to calculate power

(i) Power to move a body:

Consider a force ‘F’ acting on a body that is displaced in the direction of force by a distance ‘S’ with a
constant velocity v.
t
F
A B
S

Then the power is given by the following expression :

Work done  W  Force  F   displacement  S  FS

Power (P) =  P
Time (t) Time (t) t

FS
Formula: Power =  F.v
t

(ii) Power to stop a moving body : Consider a force ‘F’ acting on a body against the direction of the motion of the
body. The body is stopped in time ‘t’ after travelling through a distance ‘S’.

t
F
A B
S

Then, the power used to stop the body can be obtained by the following expression.

Work done (W)

Power (P) = Time (t)

132
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Force  F   displacement in the direction of force

Time (t)
 FS
P
t
Note –ve sign indicates that power is used against the direction of motion of the body.
(iii) Power to pull a body : Consider a force ‘F’ acting in the direction that makes an angle '  ' with the direction of
the motion.
F

A B
S
t
If ‘S’ is the distance travelled by the body in time (t), then power used by the body can be calculated by the
following expression.
Work done  W 
Power (P) = Time  t 

FScos 
Formula : Power =
t
(iv) Power to lift a body against gravity : Consider a mass ‘m’ lifted from the surface to a height ‘h’ against gravity.
If ‘t’ is the time taken to lift the body, then the power can be calculated by the following expression.
Work done (W)
Power (P) = Time (t)

Weight of the body (mg)×Distance which it is lifted (h)

=
Time (t)

mgh
Formula : Power =
t

 mgh
Power against gravity, P 
t

133
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(v) Power to stop a body moving with velocity (v) : Consider a body moving with a velocity ‘v’ m/s. If ‘F’ is the
force applied to stop the body, then power of the body is given by the following expression.

Work done (W) Force  F   Displacement  S

Power  P   
Time  T  Time  t 

FS S S
P  P  F   v  
t t t

Formula : Power = Fv

Summary of power

Definition Measuring formula Units

Power is the rate

at which work is done

Power to Power to pull a Power to lift a Power of a

General Power to
stop a moving body through body against body moving
formula move a body
body an angle  gravity with velocity

W FS  FS FScos  mgh
P P P P P P=F ×v
t t t t t

SI unit CGS unit Practical unit

J/s or watt erg/s Horse power (hp)

Relation between the different units

1 watt = 1 J/s and 1 hp = 746 W = 0.746 kW

ELECTRIC ENERGY
The work done by a source of electricity to maintain a current in an electrical circuit is known as electric
energy. Consider an electric circuit through which current I flows for time t. If charge q flows through the circuit for
time t then,
q = It -------- (i)
If V is the potential difference applied across the circuit, then work done to maintain the flow of charge q
through it is given by,

134
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

W = Vq
Using equation (i), we get
W = VIt --------- (ii)
This work done is equal to the electrical energy consumed in the circuit.
 Electric energy, E = VIt .............. (iii)
(a) Electric Power :
Electric power is defined as the amount of electric energy consumed in a circuit in one second.
If E be the amount of electric energy consumed in a circuit for t seconds, then the electric power is given by,
E
P -------- (i)
t
Since E = Electric energy = VIt
VIt
 P or P = VI --------- (ii)
t
Thus, electric power is defined as the product of potential difference applied across the circuit and current
flowing through it.
(b) Other forms of Electric Power :
According to ohm’s law
V = IR
 From equation (ii)
P = I2R --------- (iii)
V
Also I 
R
 From equation (ii),
V2
P ------- (iv)
R

V2
Thus, P  VI  I R 
2

R
(c) Relation between electric energy and electric power:
We know, electric energy = VIt
and electric power = VI
 Electric energy = electric power × time
(d) Commercial unit of electric energy :
Kilowatt - hour (kWh):
Electric energy is required to run the electric lamps, heaters, refrigerators, televisions and other electric appliances.
Electric energy is given to the consumers in units called kilowatt-hours (kWh). If our electricity bill shows that we
have pay to for 10 units, then it means the electric appliances of our house have consumed 10 kilowatt-hours. So, 1
unit = 1 kWh.

135
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

A kilowatt-hour is the amount of electric energy used by 1000 Watt electric appliance (say a heater) when it
operates for one hour.
kWh is also known as “Board of Trade Unit” (B.O.T.)
(e) Relation between kWh and Joule:
1 kWh = 1000 Wh

 1kW  1000 W 
Now 1 W = 1 Js–1 and 1 h = 60 × 60 s = 3600 s.

 1 kWh  1000 Js 1  3600s  3600000 J  3.6  106 J

 1 kWh  3.6  106 J

Electron volt is also the unit of energy. The energy of an electron, when it is accelerated by a potential difference of
1 volt, is known as one electron volt.
1 electron volt = 1.6 × 10–19 joule.

 1 e.V.  1.6  1019 J

(f) Calculation of Electricity Bill:
The electricity bill of appliances is calculated by the following formula:

Power (in watt)  No.of appliances  time  in hrs 

Consumed electric energy =  in kWh 
1000
Eg.: Suppose electric appliances of a house consumed 100 kWh of electricity in a month and the cost of one
unit is Rs. 5. Then the total bill for a month = 100 × 5 = Rs. 500. [Here 1 kWh = 1 unit.]
Example 13 : How many kilograms will a man working at power 150 W be able to lift at constant speed of 1 m/s
vertically?
Solution : P = 150 W
P 150
P = F × v = mg v; m   15 kg
gv 10  1
Example 14 : An elevator weighing 500 kg is to be lifted up at a constant velocity of 0.4 m/s. What should be the
minimum horse power of the motor to be used?
Solution : Here m = 500 kg
v = 0.4 m/s. P=?
P = Fv = mg × v = 500 × 9.8 × 0.4 = 1960 watts
If we assume that there is no loss against friction etc. in the motor, then minimum horse power of the motor
1960
P  2.62 hp .
746
136
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

COLLISION OR IMPACT
Collision is an event in which an impulsive force acts between two or more bodies for a short time, which
results in change of their velocities.
NOTE: (i) In a collision, particles may or may not come in physical contact.
(ii) The duration of collision, t is negligible. So that the force is impulsive.
(iii) In a collision the effect of external non impulsive forces such as gravity are not taken into account as due to small
duration of collision ( t ) average impulsive force responsible for collision is much larger than external forces acting
on the system.
During collision change in momentum of individual particles takes place. Thus, law of conservation of linear momentum
is essential in dealing with the phenomenon of collision between particles.
LINE OF IMPACT
The line along which internal force of collision acts during impact is called line of impact.
Direction of line of impact can be determined by:
(i) Geometry of colliding objects like spheres, discs, wedge etc.
(ii) Direction of change of momentum.
If one particle is stationary before the collision then the line of impact will be along its direction of motion after
collision.
CLASSIFICATION OF COLLISION
(a) On the basis of line of impact:
(i) Head-on collision or direct collision
If the velocities of the colliding particles are along the same line before and after the collision.
(ii) Oblique collision:
If the velocities of the colliding particles are along different lines before and after the collision.
Elastic collision
A collision is said to be elastic when there is no loss of KE during collision. The linear momentum will also be
conserved during elastic collision. Also forces involved in elastic collision are conservative.
eg. Collision between atomic and subatomic particles are elastic. Practically collision between two ivory balls is
considered to be elastic.
In elastic collision the colliding particles, regain there shape and size completely after collision i.e, no mechanical
energy is stored as deformation potential energy in the bodies.
Inelastic collision
A collision in which there occurs some loss of KE is called an inelastic collision. The colliding particles do not
regain their shape or size completely after collision. Some mechanical energy will be retained by colliding particles as
deformation PE. When no external forces are acting the momentum remains conserved.
Perfectly inelastic collision
If two bodies stick together after collision, the collision is perfectly inelastic. In otherwords the velocity of
separation along the line of impact just after collision becomes zero then the collision is perfectly inelastic.
eg., Mud thrown on a wall sticking on to it. Or an arrow gets stuck in a target and they move together
Note: Actually collision between all real objects are neither perfectly elastic nor perfectly inelastic. It is inelastic in
nature.

137
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 13: A body of mass 10 kg moving with velocity 5 m/s hits another body of mass 20 kg moving with
same velocity in opposite direction and sticks to it. What is the velocity of compound body?
Solution : Initial momentum = 20 × 5 – 10 × 5 = 50 kg m/s
Final momentum = 30 × v = 50 kg m/s

50 5
 Final velocity = v   m/s
30 3
Example 14 : A body of mass 1 kg strikes elastically with another body at rest and continues to move in the same
direction with one fourth the initial velocity. What is the mass of the other body?
Solution : Initial momentum = 1 × v

v
Final momentum = 1  x 
4

v
 1 v  1  x  ; 1 + x = 4, x = 3 kg
4

138
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

LEVEL I [HOMEWORK]
1. A man weighing 50 kg climbs 10 m high. Calculate the work done by gravity.

A) –4900 J B) –500 J C) –50 J D) –49 J

2. The correct relation between joule and erg is

A) 1 J = 10–7 erg B) 1 J = 107 erg C) 1 J = 10–5 erg D) 1 J = 105 erg

3. A ball of mass 0.2 kg is thrown vertically upwards by applying a force by hand. If the hand moves 0.2 m while
applying the force and the ball goes upto 2 m height further. Find the magnitude of the force (Consider
g  10 m/s 2 )
A) 22 N B) 4 N C) 16 N D) 20 N
4. A running man has the same kinetic energy as that of a boy of half his mass. The man speeds up by 2 ms–1 and
the boy changes his speed by x ms–1 so that the kinetic energies of the boy and the man are again equal. Then
x in ms–1 is

A) 2 2 B) 2 2 C) 2 D) 2

5. A body is undergoing non-uniform circular motion. Work done by radial force on the body is

A) zero B) positive C) negative D) none of these

6. A 60 kg man with 10 kg load on his head climbs 25 steps of 0.20 m height each. What is the work done in
climbing? (g = 10 m/s2)

A) 5 J B) 350 J C) 100 J D) 3500 J

7. The work done in pushing a block of mass 10 kg from bottom to the top of a frictionless inclined plane 5 m long
and 3 m high is (g = 9.8 m/s2)

A) 392 J B) 294 J C) 98 J D) 0.98 J

8. A body of mass 5 kg has a momentum of 100 kg ms–1. Calculate its kinetic energy.

A) 1000 J B) 10,000 J C) 100 J D) 10 J

9. The KE acquired by a mass m in travelling a certain distance d, starting from rest, under the action of a constant
force is directly proportional to

1
A) m B) m C) D) independent of m
m

10. A vehicle is moving on a rough horizontal road with kinetic energy K. If the force of friction on the vehicle be F,
then the stopping distance will be given by:

K K K K
A) B) C) D)
F F F F
139
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. A bullet fired into a fixed target loses half of its velocity after penetrating 3 cm. How much further it will
penetrate before coming to rest assuming that it faces constant resistance to motion?
A) 1.0 cm B) 1.5 cm C) 2.0 cm D) 3.0 cm
12. The bob of a simple pendulum is held in the horizontal position A as shown in figure. Calculate the speed of the
bob of the pendulum at the lowest position B when released. The length of the pendulum is 0.5 m, and it is
assumed that there is no loss of energy.

A) 31.3 ms–1 B) 3.13 ms–1 C) 13.3 ms–1 D) 1.3 ms–1

13. A long spring is stretched by 2 cm. Its P.E. is V. What will be its P.E., if the spring is stretched by 10 cm?
A) 25 V B) 2 V C) 10 V D) 20 V
14. The force constant of a wire is k and that of the another wire is 3 k when both the wires are stretched through
same distance, if work done are W1 and W2, then...

A) W2  3W12 B) W2  0.33 W1 C) W2  W1 D) W2  3W1

15. A vertical spring with force constant K is fixed on a table. A ball of mass m at a height h above the free upper
end of the spring falls vertically on the spring so that the spring is compressed by a distance d. The net work
done in the process is

1 1 1 1
A) mg  h  d   Kd B) mg  h  d   Kd C) mg  h  d   Kd D) mg  h  d   Kd
2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2
16. The bob of simple pendulum (mass m and length l) dropped from a horizontal position strike a block of the
same mass elastically placed on a horizontal frictionless table. The K.E. of the block will be

mgl
A) 2 mgl B) C) mgl D) zero
2
17. A 40 kg child runs up a flight of stairs 4 m high in 2 seconds. Calculate his power.
A) 1568 W B) 40 W C) 784 W D) 0 W
18. An engine develops 10 kW of power. How much time will it take to lift the mass of 200 kg to a height of 40 m?
Take g = 10 ms–2.
A) 16 sec B) 10 sec C) 8 sec D) 12 sec

140
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

19. A 2 kg block slides on a horizontal floor with a speed of 4 m/s. It strikes an uncompressed spring, and
compresses it till the block is motionless. The kinetic frictional force is 15 N and spring constant is 10, 000 N/m .
The spring compresses by
A) 8.5 cm B) 5.5 cm C) 2.5 cm D) 11.0 cm
20. An object of mass 40 kg and having velocity 4 m/s collides with another object of mass 60 kg having velocity
2 m/s. The loss of energy when the collision is perfectly inelastic is
A) 392 J B) 440 J C) 48 J D) 10 J
LEVEL II
1. A scooter skids on a road and stops after 20 m. The force on the scooter due to the road during the process of
skidding is 100 N, due to which the scooter’s motion is opposed. Calculate (i) the work done by the road on
the scooter and (ii) work done by the scooter on the road.
A) 200 J, 0 B) –2000, 0 C) 2000, 20 D) – 2000, 20
2. A block is moved from rest through a distance of 4 m along a st. line path. The mass of the block is 5 kg and
the force acting on it is 20 N. If KE acquired by the block be 40 J, at what angle to the path is the force acting?
A) 30o B) 60o C) 45o D) 0o
3. A force of f acts on a particle such that its position x changes as shown in figure.

Calculate the work done on the particle as it moves from x = 0 to x = 20 m.

A) 300 J B) 30 J C) 15 J D) 45 J
g
4. A cord is used to lower vertically a block of mass M, a distance d at a constant downward acceleration of .
4
The work done by the cord on teh block is
d d d
A) Mg B) 3Mg C) 3Mg D) Mg d
4 4 4
5. The relationship between force and position is shown in figure (in one dimensional case). The work done by
the force in displacing a body from x = 1 cm to x = 5 cm is:

A) 20 erg B) 60 erg C) 70 erg D) 700 erg.

141
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

6. An engine pumps water through a hose pipe. Water passes through the pipe and leaves it with a velocity of 2 m/
s. The mass per unit length of water in the pipe is 100 kg/m. What is the power of the engine?
A) 400 W B) 200 W C) 100 W D) 800 W
7. A block is moved from rest through a distance of 4 m along a st. line path. The mass of the block is 5 kg and
the force acting on it is 20 N. If KE is acquired by the block be 40 J, at what angle to the path is the force
acting?
A) 30o B) 60o C) 45o D) 0o
8. A body of mass 1 kg falls from rest through a distance of 200 m and acquires a speed of 50 m/s. Work done
against friction of a air is (Take g = 10 m/s2)
A) 700 J B) 12500 J C) 750 J D) 1960 J
9. A meter stick of mass 400 g is pivoted at one end and displaced through an angle of 60o. The increase in its
potential energy is
A) 1 J B) 10 J C) 100 J D) 1000 J
10. A spherical ball of mass 20 kg is stationary at the top of a ball of height 100 m. It rolls down a smooth surface
to the ground, then climbs up another hill of height 30 m and finally rolls down to a horizontal base at a height 20
m above the ground. Calculate the velocity attained by the ball.
A) 40 m/s B) 10 m/s C) 30 m/s D) 20 m/s
11. A spring of force constant 800 N/m has an extension of 5 cm. Calculate the work done in extending it from
5 cm to 15 cm.
A) 15 J B) 5 J C) 8 J D) 10 J
12. A single conservative force F(x) acts on a 2.5 kg particle that moves along the x-axis. The potential energy U(x)
is given by U(x) = (10 + (x – 4)2) where x is in meter. At x = 6.0 m the particle has kinetic energy of 20 J. What
is the mechanical energy of the system?
A) 34 J B) 45 J C) 48 J D) 49 J
13. A bus weighing 10,000 kg is moving with a speed of 36 km h–1. How much retarding force is required to stop
this bus in a distance of 50 m?
A) –10,000 N B) 10,000 N C) 100 D) – 100
14. A beed starts sliding from A on a frictionless wire with initial velocity of 4 m/s. On reaching C, its velocity
will be
A

C
5m
2.6 m

B
A) zero B) 2 m/s C) 4 m/s D) 8 m/s

142
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

15. A jet engine develops a forward force on the aircraft of 200,000 N. Calculate the power of the engine if the
aircraft is flying at 720 km h–1.
A) 4 × 107 W B) 2 × 105 W C) 720 W D) 200 W
16. The power of water pump is 2 kW. If g = 10 ms–2, the amount of water it can raise in 1 minute to a height of
10m is
A) 2000 litres B) 1000 litres C) 100 litres D) 1200 litres
17. Two solid rubber balls A and B having masses 200 and 400 gm respectively are moving in opposite direction
with velocity of A equal to 0.3 m/sec. After collision, the two balls come to rest when the velocity of B is:
A) 0.15 m/sec B) 1.5 m/sec C) –0.15 m/sec D) –0.2 m/sec
18. A bomb of mass 3.0 kg explodes in air into two pieces of masses 2.0 kg and 1.0 kg. The smaller mass goes at
a speed of 80 m/s. The total energy imparted to the two fragments is
A) 1.07 kJ B) 2.14 kJ C) 2.4 kJ D) 4.8 kJ
LEVEL III
More than one correct options.
1. A heavy stone is thrown from a cliff of height h in a given direction. The speed with which it hits the ground
A) must be larger than the speed of projection
B) must be independent of the speed of projection
C) must depend on the speed of projection
D) may be smaller than the speed of projection.
2. If force is always perpendicular to motion
A) KE remains constant B) work done = 0
C) speed is constant D) velocity is constant
3. KE of a particle increases continuously with time when
A) resultant force on the particle must be parallel to the velocity at all instants
B) the resultant force on the particle must be at an angle less than 90o all the time
C) magnitude of its linear momentum is increasing continuously
D) its height above the ground must decrease continuously
4. A ball hits a floor and rebounds after an inelastic collision. In this case,
A) total energy of the ball and the earth remains the same
B) total momentum of the ball and the earth is conserved
C) momentum of the ball just after the collision is same as that just before the collision
D) mechanical energy of the ball remains the same during the collision

143
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Passage Comprehension
Passage I
Mechanical energy exists in two forms: kinetic energy and potential energy. Kinetic energy is the energy possessed
by a body by virtue of motion. Potential energy is the energy possessed by a body by virtue of its position or
configuration. These two forms of energy are inter-convertible. If no other forms of energy is involved in a
process, the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy always remains constant.
5. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 have equal linear momenta. The ratio of their kinetic energies is
2
m2 m2  m2 
A) 1 B) C) m D)  
m1 1  m1 
6. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 have equal kinetic energies. The ratio of their linear momenta is
2
m1 m1  m1 
A) 1 B) C) m D)  
m2 2  m2 

m
7. A particle of mass m has half the kinetic energy of another particle of mass . The ratio of the original speeds
2
of the heavier and lighter particles is
A) 1 : 1 B) 1 : 2 C) 1 : 3 C) 1 : 4
8. A uniform rod of mass m and length l is made to stand vertically on one end. The potential energy of the rod in
this position is

mgl mgl mgl

A) B) C) D) mgl
4 3 2
Matrix Match Type.
9. Match the following.

Column I Column II
A) Impulse equals p) Rate of change of linear momentum
B) Force equals q) Rate at which energy is consumed
C) Power is r) Product of force and displacement
D) Work is defined as s) Change in linear momentum

Integer Answer Type.

10. The energy required to accelerate a car from 10 m/s to 20 m/s is n times the energy required to accelerate the
same from rest to 10 m/s, where n is
11. A spring is kept compressed by a small cart of mass 150 g. On releasing the cart, it moves with a speed of 0.2
ms–1. The potential energy of the spring is (PE in terms of 10–3 J)
12. A block of mass 2 m, moving with a constant velocity 3v collides with another block of mass m, which is at rest
and sticks to it. The velocity of the compound block is nv , where n is

144
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Reasoning Type.
Each question contains Statement I and Statement II. Of these Statements, mark correct choice if
A) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
B) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
13. Statement I : A coolie does more work when he raised a box onto the roof of a bus in less time.
Statement II : Work done does not depend on the time taken.
14. Statement I : In an elastic collision of two billiards balls, the kinetic energy is conserved during the short
interval of time of collision between the balls.
Statement II : Energy spent against friction does not follow the law of conservation of energy.
15. Statement I : Work done by or against gravitational force in moving a body from one point to another is
independent of the actual path followed between the two points.
Statement II : This is because gravitational forces are conservative forces.
16. Statement I : When a spring is either stretched or compressed, it has potential energy.
Statement II : Work is done against the restoring force in both the cases.
17. Statement I : Work done by or against force of friction in moving a body through any round trip is zero.
Statement II : This is because friction is a conservative force.
18. Statement I : Kinetic energy is conserved in both, perfectly elastic and perfectly inelastic collisions.
Statement II : Becasue linear momentum is conserved in both.
NTSE PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS
1. Two masses of 1 gm and of 4 gm are moving with equal linear momentum, the ratio of their kinetic energies is:
(2013)
A) 4 : 1 B) 2 :1 C) 1 : 2 D) 1 : 16
2. Dimensions of power is: (2013)

A)  M 2 L2 T 2  B)  ML2 T 3  C)  M 2 LT 3  D)  MLT 2 
3. A ball of mass 50 g is thrown upwards. It rises to a maximum height of 100 m. At what height its kinetic energy
will be reduced to 70%: (2013)
A) 30 m B) 40 m C) 60 m D) 70 m
4. A device which converts the electrical energy into the mechanical energy is called: (2013)
A) dynamo B) electromagnet C) electric motor D) generator
5. A person of mass 50 kg runs upto a staircase of 40 steps in 6 sec. If the height of each step is 15 cm, then his
power will be (If g = 10 m/s2) (2015)
A) 300 W B) 500 W C) 600 W D) 1000 W

145
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

6. Two bodies with kinetic energies in the ratio 4 : 1 are moving with equal linear momentum. The ratio of their
masses is: (2014)
A) 1 : 2 B) 1 : 1 C) 4 : 1 D) 1 : 4
7. When we rub our hands, which of the following is true? (2014)
A) Kinetic energy converted to heat energy B) Heat energy converted to mechanical energy
C) Mechanical energy converted to heat energy D) Heat energy converted to kinetic energy
8. The Kinetic energy of an object is K. If its velocity is doubled, then its kinetic energy will be : (2014)
K
A) K B) 2 K C) 4 K D)
4
9. A boy is rotating a stone of mass 500 gm in a circular motion, by using a string of length 50 cm with a speed
10 cm/s. What will be the work done by the force applied by the boy: (2014)
A) 0.01 J B) J C) 10J D) Zero
10. A large truck and a car are moving with same velocity have a head on collision. Which of the following is an
INCORRECT statement? (2015)
A) Both vehicles experience equal force of impact B) The car will experience greater force of impact
C) The truck will experience lesser acceleration D) The car will experience greater acceleration
11. A car with KE 100 J is moving on a horizontal road. Now 200 J work is done on the car. The change in K.E.
is: (2015)
A) Zero B) 100 J C) 200 J D) 300 J
12. A light particle moving horizontally with a speed of 12 m/s strikes a very heavy block moving in the same
direction of 10 m/s. The collision is one dimensional and elastic. In elastic collision, the conservation of
momentum and conservation of kinetic energy are valid. After the collision, the particle will be: (2015)
A) move at 12 m/s opposite to its original direction
B) move at 8 m/s in its original direction
C) move at 8 m/s opposite to its original direction
D) move at 2 m/s in its original direction.
13. The value of 200 units of electrical energy in joules will be : (2017)
A) 7.20 108 J B) 7.20 10 7 J C) 72  108 J D) 7.2  10 6 J
14. The work required to increase the velocity of a particle from 18 km/h to 72 km/h, if mass of particle is 2 kg is
(2017)
A) 275 J B) 225 J C) 15 J D) 375 J
15. When the speed of a particle is doubled, the ratio of its kinetic energy to its momentum: (2017)
A) remains the same B) gets doubled C) becomes half D) becomes four times
16. Two bodies of unequal masses possess the same momentum. The K.E. of the heavier mass will be ..... The
KE of the lighter mass: (2017)
A) Same as B) Greater than C) Less than D) Much greater than

146
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

17. An object of mass one kilogram is lifted vertically to a height one metre, then the amount of work done will be
(2017)
A) 9.8 J B) 1 J C) 9.8 erg D) both ‘A’ and ‘B’
18. A pump motor is used to deliver water at a certain rate from a given pipe. To obtain twice as much water from
the same pipe in the same time, the power of motor has to be increased: (2017)
A) 16 times B) 4 times C) 8 times D) 2 times
19. How much water a pump of 2 kW power can raise in one minute to a height of 10 m? (g = 10 m/s2)(2017)
A) 1000 litre B) 1200 litre C) 10 litre D) 2000 litre
20. In a simple pendulum, the mass of bob is m and effecting length is L. Work done on the pendulum in one
complete oscillation in gravitational field of earth is (2017)

1 1
A) mgL B) mgL C) Zero D) mgL
4 2
21. Work is said to be done if the force and displacement are: (2017)
A) Parallel to each other B) Opposite to each other

C) Inclined at an angle  with each other    90o  D) All of the above

22. A body of mass 5 kg initially at rest is moved by a horizontal force of 2 N on a smooth horizontal surface. The
work done by the force in 10 seconds is .......
A) 10 J B) 50 J C) 40 J D) 20 J
23. A body of mass 2 kg starts from rest and moves with uniform acceleration. It acquires a velocity of 20 m/s in
4 seconds. The power exerted on the body in 2 seconds is
A) 50 watts B) 100 watts C) 150 watts D) 200 watts
24. The value of 200 units of energy into joules will be
A) 7.20 108 J B) 7.20 107 J C) 72  108 J D) 7.2  106 J
25. The work required to increase the velocity of a particle from 18 km/h to 72 km/h, if mass of particle is 2 kg, is
A) 275 J B) 225 J C) 15 J D) 375 J

147
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 6
GRAVITATION

Every particle in the universe attracts every other particle, which has been suggested by Newton forms the
basis of Newtons law of gravitation.
Newton’s Universal law of Gravitation :
Every particle in the universe attracts every other particle with a force directly proportional to the product of
the masses of the particle and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.
Mathematical Expression:
m1 m2

r
According to law of gravitation
F  m1 m 2 ................(i)

1
F ......................(ii)
r2
combining (i) and (ii)
m1 m 2 Gm1 m 2
F  F
r2 r2
Where G is proportionality constant and is known as the universal gravitational constant.
(a) Universal Gravitational Constant:
(i) Definition :
Gm1 m 2
In relation, F 
r2
If m1 = m2 = 1, r = 1, then F = G. Hence, universal gravitational constant may be defined as the force of
attraction between two bodies of unit mass separated by unit distance apart.
(ii) Units of G:
Gm1m 2
F
r2

148
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Fr 2 Nm 2
We have , G  ; In S.I. G   Nm 2 kg 2
m1m 2 kg kg
dyne cm 2
In C.G.S G   dyne cm2 g 2
g.g
(iii) Values of G:
In S.I G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2 kg–2
In C.G.S G = 6.67 × 10-8 dyne cm2 g–2
Illustrations
1. Two persons having mass 50kg each, are standing such that the centre of gravity are 1m apart.
Calculate the force of gravitation and also calculate the force of gravity on each.
(Take G = 6.67×10-11 N.m2 kg2 , mass of earth M = 6×1024 kg, radius of earth R = 6.4×106 m).
Solution: Given : m1 = m2 = 50 kg
r = 1m, G = 6.67×10-11 N.m2/kg2
Gm1m 2
Force of gravitation F =
r2

6.67 1011  50  50
F  1.67  107 N
1
2

Force of gravity is the force with which earth attracts every body towards its centre.
GMm
F Here r = R, radius of the earth and m1 = M = mass of earth, m2 = m = mass of object
r2

6.67 1011  6  1024  50

F   0.48 103 N........(ii)
 6.4 10  6 2

F is much greater than F so the persons will not move towards each other but each of them moves towards the
earth.
Between sun and earth Between moon and earth
24
Mass of earth 6 × 10 kg Mass of earth 6 × 1024 kg
Mass of sun 2 × 1030 kg Mass of moon 7.4 × 1022 kg
Distance of earth 1.5 × 1011 m Distance of moon 3.8 × 108 m
from sun from earth
Gravitational force 6.67  1011  6 10 24  2  1030 Gravitational force 6  1024  7.4  1022
between sun and between earth and
Gm1m 2 1.5 10 11 2
Gm1m 2  3.8 10 
8 2

earth moon
r2  3.6  10 22 N r2  2.05 1020 N
2. Two bodies A and B having mass m and 2m respectively are kept at a distance d apart. Where should a small
particle be placed so that the net gravitational force on it due to the bodies A and B is zero?
Solution : It is clear that the particle must be placed on the line AB, supports it is at a distance x from A. Let
its mass is m'.
149
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Gmm
The force on m' due to A, F1  towards A
x2
A B
m'
G  2m  m m 2m
and that due to B is- F2  towards B F2
d  x  F1
2

x d–x

Gmm G  2m  m
The net force will be zero if F1 = F2 ; Thus, x 2  d  x 2
 
d d
or (d-x)2 = 2x2; dx  2x ; 
d  1 2 x ;  x
1  2  or
x
1  2 
d
As x cannot be negative ; So x = 1  2  
Example 1 : Gravitational force between point masses m and M separated by a distance is F. Now if a point mass
2 m is placed next to m, what will be the force on M due to m and total force on M.
GMm GM3m
Force on M due to m   F; Force on M due to 3m   3F
d2 d2
Example 2 : Three uniform spheres each having mass m and radius r are kept in such a way that each touches the
other two. Find the magnitude of gravitational force on any sphere due to the other two.
Let m is the mass of each sphere and r is the radius of each sphere.

F2 F
m
r
r r
m
r
r r
m

F is the net force on a sphere due to the other two.

Gm 2 Gm 2 2 2
 F  F1 cos 30  F2 cos 30  cos 30  cos 30  2.Gm cos 30  3 Gm
 2r   2r 
2 2
4r 2 4r 2
Acceleration due to gravity
If we drop a ball from a height, its speed increases as time passes. If we throw a ball upwards, its speed
decreases till it reaches the highest point. If we throw the ball at an angle to the vertical, its direction of motion
changes. In all these cases, the velocity of the ball changes , i.e., the ball is accelerated, whenever an object moves
near the surface of the earth with no other object pushing or pulling it. This acceleration is caused due to the force of
gravity and is called the acceleration due to gravity.
150
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Consider an object of mass m moving freely near the earth’s surface. Neglecting air resistance, the only force
on it , is due to gravity. This force has magnitude:
GM e m
F .............(i)
R 2e

where Me = mass of the earth, m = mass of the object, and Re = radius of the earth
As the earth’s radius Re (6400 km) is large as compared to distance of the object from the earth’s surface. We
use Re in equation (i) to denote the distance of the object from the centre of the earth. As the force given by equation
(i), is the resultant force on the object, its acceleration is

F GM e
a 
m R e2

Note that this acceleration does not depend on the mass of the object. Thus we have the following :
If gravity is the only acting force (meaning that air resistance is neglected ), all objects move with the same
acceleration near the earth’ s surface. This acceleration is called the acceleration due to gravity, whose magnitude ‘g’
is given by

 11 Nm 
2

2  
 6.67  10  6  1024 kg 
GM e kg
g g   9.8 ms 2
R e2 ;
 6.4 10 m 
6 2

The direction of this acceleration is towards the centre of the earth, i.e, in the vertically downward direction.
The acceleration has the same value, both in magnitude (9.8 m/s 2) and direction (towards center of earth),
whether the particle falls , moves up or moves at some angle with the vertical. In all these cases, we say that the
particle moves freely under gravity.

1
The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon is times the acceleration due to gravity on the surface
6
of the earth.
Mass of earth and mean density of earth
(a) Mass of the Earth:
The mass of the earth can be calculated by using Newton’s law of gravitation. Consider a body of mass m lying
on the surface of the earth, then force of gravity acting on the body is given by
GMm
F ............(i) ; Where, M = mass of the earth; R = radius of the earth
R2
Also, F = mg ................(ii)
GMm gR 2
From (i) and (ii), we have mg  or M 
R2 G

151
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(b) Mean Density of Earth :

GM
We know, g 
R2
Let  be the mean density of the earth. Since earth is assumed to be a homogeneous sphere of radius R,
therefore, mass of the earth is given by
4
M = Volume ×density = R 3
3
G 4 3 4
Substituting this value in equation (i), we get g  2
 R   GR
R 3 3
3g
 
4GR
Variation of g
Due to shape of earth
Earth is not a perfect sphere but an oblate sphere. It is Bulged at equator and flattened at the poles. Equatorial
radius 21 km more than polar radius.
1
On the surface of earth g  , Due to this the value of g increases from equator and maximum at poles.
R2
Due to change in altitude
GM
On the surface of earth g  and on a height h, above the surface of earth.
R2
GM GM
g  i.e., g 
R  h
2 2
 h
R 1  
2

 R
So with increase in height g decreases.
If h << R,
2
 h  2h 
g  g  1    g  1  
 R  R 
With depth
For calculating acceleration due to gravity at depth d,
4 3
Mass of earth  R  .  - density of earth.
3
G 4 3 4
g  2
 R   GR
R 3 3

152
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

d
R (R – d)

 Acceleration due to gravity at a depth d,

4
gd  G  R  d  
3

gd R  d  d
   1  
g R  R

 d
g d  g 1  
 R
At centre of earth d = R,  g d  0
i.e., at the centre of earth acceleration due to gravity is zero. Going down from the surface of earth acceleration
due to gravity decreases.
Variation in g due to Rotation of Earth
Effect of latitude (Due to Rotation of earth about its own axis)
Latitude at a place is defined as the angle which the line joining the place to the centre of the earth makes
with the equatorial plane. It is generally denoted by the letter  .

N
r P A
C



O E

S Equatorial
plane

Suppose g is the acceleration due to gravity when earth were at rest, then the gravity pull on the particle (i.e.
true weight of the particle) = mg ; which acts along a vertical direction PO.
Let g' be the acceleration due to gravity at P when rotation of earth is taken into account.
Then apparent weight of the particle at P = mg'
g  g  R2 cos 2 

As cos  and  are positive, thereforee g1  g

Thus acceleration due to gravity

153
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(i) decreases on account of rotation of earth

(ii) increases with the increase in latitude of the place
Comparison between ‘g’ and ‘G’

Acceleration due to gravity (g) Universal gravitational constant (G)

1 The acceleration produced in a body falling The gravitational force between two bodies
freely under the action of gravitational pull of of unit masses separated by a unit distance
the earth is known as acceleration due to is known as universal gravitational constant.
gravity.
2 The value of ‘g’ is different at different points The value of ‘G’ is same at every point in
on the earth. the universe.
3 The value of ‘g’ decreases as we go higher The value of ‘G’ does not change with
from the surface of the earth or as we go deep height and depth from the surface of the
into the earth. earth.
4 The value of ‘g’ at the centre of the earth is The value of ‘G’ is not zero at the centre of
zero. the earth or anywhere else.
5 The value of ‘g’ is different on the surfaces of The value of ‘G’ is same throughout the
different heavenly bodies like the sun, moon, universe.
the planets.
6 The value of ‘g’ on the surface of the earth is The value of G = 6.673 × 10–11 Nm2 kg–2
9.8 ms –2. throughout the universe.

1
Example 3 : The mass of the red planet is 0.1 times of the earth and its radius is that of the earth. Compare the
2
acceleration due to gravity on the planet’s surface to that on the surface of the earth.
Solution : Mass = m Mass = Mp = 0.1 M e
Radius = R R
Radius = R p  e
Earth Red planet 2

GM e R e2
2
ge Re 2  M  Rp  Me
  e     4
 
g p GM p  M p   R e  0.1M e R e2
R 2P

ge : gp = 10 : 4 = 5 : 2
Example 4 : Compute the mass and density of the moon if acceleration due to gravity on its surface is 1.62 and its
radius is 1.74 × 106 m (G = 6.67 × 10–11 mks units)

154
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

R 2 g 1.74  10   1.62
6 2
GM
g 2 , M   7.35  1022 kg
R G 6.67  1011

M gR 2 3g 3  1.62
     3.3  103 kg / m 3
V 4  4GR 11
4  3.14  6.67 10  1.74  10 6
G  R 3 
3 
Mass and Weight
(a) Mass:
Definition : quantity of matter possessed by a body, is called the mass of the body. It is represented by the
symbol m .It is a scalar quantity.
Inertia: A body requires a force to change its state. A body with more mass, needs a greater effort (force) to
move it from rest or stopping it from motion. This is due to inertia. Thus, mass offers inertia. So this mass is called
inertial mass. A body never has no zero mass.
Measurement of mass: Mass of a body is measured by a beam balance by comparing the mass with bodies
of known mass. At one place, bodies of same mass have same pull of gravity on them.
A beam balance works on the principle of moments (Bodies of equal masses, having equal weights, have equal
and opposite moments about fulcrum of the balance, when suspended at equal distances from the fulcrum and make
the beam horizontal).
(b) Weight:
Definition: The force with which a body is attracted towards the centre of the earth, is called the weight of the
body. It is represented by the symbol W.
It is a vector quantity having direction towards the centre of the earth. It’s unit is Newton (N)
Expression for Weight: If mass of a body = m
Acceleration due to gravity of the earth = g
Then from relation,
Force = Mass ×Acceleration i.e, W = mg
Since W = mg, the weight of a body will vary from place to place due to variation in value of g.
A body has zero weight at the centre of the earth (where g = 0)
Measurement of weight: Weight of a body is measured by a spring balance.
(c) Difference between Mass and Weight:
Mass Weight
1 Mass is quantiy of matter possessed by a Weight is the force with which a body is
body. attracted towards the centre of the earth.
2 It is a scalar quantity. It is a vector quantity.
3 Its S.I. unit is kilogram (kg). Its S.I. unit is newton (N)
4 Mass of a body remains constant at all places. Weight of the body changes from place to
place.
5 Mas is measured by a beam balance. Weight is measured by a spring balance.

155
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1
i.e. weight on moon = th weight on earth
6
Gravitational unit of force kg-wt:
From relation, W = mg
If m = 1kg Wt = 9.8 N
Hence a 1kg body has a weight of 9.8 N
It means that 9.8 N becomes equal to a force of 1 kilogram weight (kg.wt.). 1 kg wt = 9.8 N.
(e) Variation in the weight of a body :
Weight of the body is given by, W = mg
The weight of a body depends upon (i) the mass of the body and (ii) value of acceleration due to gravity (g) at
a place.
Gravitational field
The sphere of influence surrounding a mass in which gravitational force is experienced is called the gravitational
field.
Gravitational Intensity
The strength of the gravitational field is measured in terms of gravitational intensity. The force experienced on a
unit mass placed at a point in the gravitational field of a body is called the gravitational intensity at that point.
F GMm GM
I   2 .
m r2  m r
Unit of gravitational intensity is N kg–1
Gravitational potential
The gravitational potential at a point is defined as the negative of the work done in shifting a unit mass from
infinity to the given point.

W
V     (W is the work done in shifting a mass, m from infinity to a point.
m
It is a scalar quantity and Unit is J/kg.
Potential at a point represents the PE of a unit point mass at that point.
GM
V
r
Gravitational Potential Energy
Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point in a gravitational field of another body is defined as
the amount of work done in bringing the given body from infinity to that point without acceleration.
When the body is at infinity with respect to another body, the gravitational attraction on the body is zero.
Therefore its potential energy is zero, which is called zero level of potential energy.
The gravitational potential energy of a body at a point is defined as the amount of work done in bringing the
body from infinity to that point against the gravitational force.

156
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

r r
GMm 1
W 2
dx   GMm  

x  x 
GMm
W
r
This work done is stored inside the body as its gravitational potential energy
GMm
U  
r
Example 5 : Three particles each of mass m are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side ‘d’. Calculate
(a) PE of the system (b) work done on the system if the side of the triangle is charged from d to 2d.

m
C
o
60
d

m m
A B

Gm1m 2 3Gm 2
PE  ; PE of the system; U A  U12  U 23  U 31  
r d

3Gm 2 3Gm 2
When d is charged to 2d, U B   ;  Work done  U B  U A 
2d 2d
Example 6 : What are the values of gravitational attraction and potential at the surface of earth referred to zero
potential at infinite distance.
Mass of earth = 6 × 1024 kg, radius of earth = 640 km., G = 6.67 × 10–11 mks units)
Gravitational attraction is the intensity of gravitational field.

GM 6.67 1011  6  1024

 I   9.8 N/kg
R2  6.4 10 
6 2

GM 6.67 1011  6 1024

Gravitational potential  V     6.25 107 J/kg
R 6.4 10 6

i.e., 1 kg mass at the surface of earth experience a force of 9.8 N and 6.25 × 107 J of work is required to shift
it from the surface of earth to infinity.
Escape velocity
157
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

It is the minimum velocity with which a body should be projected from the surface of a planet so as to reach
infinity. Due to this the body escapes the gravitational attraction of the planet.

2GM
Escape velocity ve   2gR
R

for earth Ve  2  9.8  6.4 106  11.2 km/s

Ve is independent of the mass of the body and direction of projection of the body.

Since sin v0  gR - orbital velocity

then ve  2 v 0

Example 7 : Escape velocity of a body on the surface of earth is 11.2 km/s. If the mass of earth increases to twice
its present value and radius of earth becomes half, what will be the escape velocity.

2GM
V
R

2GM 2G2M 8GM 2GM

V1  ; V2   2  2v1
R R/2 R R
 v2 = 22.4 km/s
PLANETS AND SATELLITES
(a) Planets :
Planets are large natural bodies rotating around a star in definite orbits. Our solar system consists of eight
planets, viz., Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune.
(b) Satellites:
Satellites are natural or artificial bodies describing orbit around a planet under its gravitational attraction. Moon
is a natural satellite while INSAT -IB is an artificial satellite of earth. We shall here now compute and discuss some
physical entities of interest for a satellite undergoing circular motion.
Orbital velocity v0 : It is the minimum velocity required for a satellite to revolve around a planet in an orbit.
Let a satellite of mass m be moving in an orbit of radius r with speed v0 as shown in figure. The centripetal force
required for the motion is  mv 02 / r  while the gravitational force is GMm/r2. As gravitation provides centripetal
force,

mv02 GMm GM
 2
 v02 
r r r

158
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

v0 m

h
R

GM g GM
or v0   v0  R with g  2 and r = (R+h) ..................(i)
r R  h R

From this expression it clear that:

(i) Orbital velocity is independent of the mass of the orbiting body and is always along the tangent to the orbit.
(ii) Orbital velocity depends on the mass of central body and radius of orbit. Greater the radius of orbit lesser
 1 
will be the orbital velocity  v0  
 r
(iii) Close to the surface of earth r = R as h = 0

GM
v0   gR  10  6.4  106  8 km/s
R
v0 = 8 km/s
Period of a satellite
If T is the period of revolution, then

2 2r 2r r3
T    2
 v GM GM , i.e., T 2  r 3 - Keplers law..
r

since GM  R 2 g

r3 2 r 3
T 2  2 
R 2g R g
Energy of Satellite
When a satellite revolves around a planet in its orbit, it possesses both potential energy (due to its position
against gravitational pull of earth) and kinetic energy (due to orbital motion). (L - angular momentum of a satellite,
L  mv0 r)

159
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

GMm  L2  GM 
 As V  r , L  m GMr 
2 2
1) Potential energy : U  mV   2
r mr

1 GMm L2  GM 
2) Kinetic energy : K  mv2    As v  
2 2r 2mr 2  r 

GMm GMm GMm L2

3) Total energy: E  U  K    
r 2r 2r 2mr 2
Geostationary satellite
Satellites which revolve around the equatorial plane of earth with the same period as that of the earth is called
geostationary satellites and in used for communication purposes. For this T = 24 hr.
Kepler’s Laws of Planetary Motion
(i) Law of Orbits:
Each planet moves around the sun in an elliptical orbit with the sun at one of the focal points.
(F1 and F2 are the focal points in figure)

Planet

F1 F2
Sun

(ii) Law of Areas:

The line joining the sun and a planet sweeps out equal areas in equal intervals of time.
Let a planet moves from position A to Position B in time t and then it moves from position C to Position D in
the same time t as shown in figure.

B A
C

S (Sun)

Then, according to Kepler’s second law,

Area SAB = area SCD ..............(i)

160
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

(iii) Law of Periods:

The square of the time taken by a planet to complete a revolution around the sun is directly proportional to the
cube of semi-major axis of the elliptical orbit.

B A

a B
A
O

OA = Semi-major axis

T2  a3

T2
or  constant
a3
Weightlessness
Everybody in a state of free fall appears weightless (falling down under acceleration due to gravity.)
Weightlessness may be defined as the state in which a body appears to lose its weight. This happens due to
free fall of the body.
Weightlessness of an Astronaut in a Satellite (Space Ship):
A satellite is at a height from the surface of earth. The satellites are always in a freefall towards the centre of
earth, but it does not come to the surface of earth because it is always revolving round the earth in an orbit i.e., It has
got a velocity parallel to the surface of earth.
Due to this the astronauts feel weightless.

161
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

LEVEL I [HOMEWORK]
1. Two identical solid copper spheres of radius R are placed in contact with each other. The gravitational force
between them is proportional to
A) R2 B) R–2 C) R–4 D) R4
2. Two particles of equal mass go round a circle of radius r. Under the action of their mutual gravitational force.
The speed of each particle is = ............

1 1 Gm 1 Gm 4Gm
A) v  B) v  C) v  D) v 
2r Gm 2r 2 r r
3. Gravitational attraction of Earth on the stone of mass M is FS. If the force on hydrogen balloon of mass M
located at the same space is FB, then
   
A) FS > FB B) FS < FB C) FS  FB D) FS  FB

4. If mass of a body is M on the earth surface, then the mass of the same body on the moon surface is

M
A) B) 56 C) M D) None of these
6
5. An apple falls from a tree because of gravitational attraction between the earth and apple. If F1 is the magnitude
of force exerted by the earth on the apple and F2 is the magnitude of force exerted by apple on earth, then
A) F1 is very much greater than F2 B) F2 is very much greater than F1
C) F1 is only a little greater than F2 D) F1 and F2 are equal
6. Two objects of masses m and 4 m are at rest at infinite separation. They move towards each other under
mutual gravitational attraction. Then, at a separation r, which of the following is true?
A) The total energy of the system is not zero
B) The force between them is not zero
C) The centre of mass of the system is at rest
D) All the above are true
7. The value of g on the earth surface is 980 cm/sec2. Its value at a height of 64 km from the earth surface is
...........cms–2.
A) 960.40 B) 984.90 C) 982.45 D) 977.55
8. The value of g.
A) increases as we go above the earth’s surface
B) decreases as we go to the centre of the earth
C) remains constant
D) is more at equator and less at poles

162
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

9. A ball is thrown up, the value of g will be

A) zero B) positive C) negative D) negligible
10. Objects of different masses falling freely near the surface of the moon would
A) have same velocities at any instant B) experiences forces of same magnitude
C) have different acceleration D) undergoe a change in their inertia
11. Sun is about 330 times heavier and 100 times bigger in radius than earth. The ratio of mean density of the sun
to that of earth is
A) 3.3 × 10–6 B) 3.3 × 10–4 C) 3.3 × 10–2 D) 1.3
12. The orbital velocity of earth’s satellite near the surface is 7 kms–1. when the radius of orbit is 4 times that of
earth’s radius, then orbital velocity in that orbit is = ........ kms–1.
A) 3.5 B) 17 C) 14 D) 35
13. Orbital velocity of an artificial satellite does not depend upon
A) mass of earth B) mass of satellite
C) radius of earth D) acceleration due to gravity
14. As astronaut orbiting the earth in a circular orbit 120 km above the surface of earth, gently drops a spoon out
of space-ship. The spoon will
A) Fall vertically down to the earth
B) move towards the moon
C) Will move along the space-ship
D) will move in an irregular way then fall down to earth
15. Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (IRNSS) has a group of ........... satellites.
A) 3 B) 5 C) 7 D) 9
1
16. A body weights 700 g wt on the surface of earth. How much it weigh on the surface of planet whose mass is
7
and radius is half that of the earth.
A) 200 g wt B) 400 g wt C) 50 g wt D) 300 g wt
17. What will happen to the weight of the body at the south pole, if the earth stops rotating about its polar axis?
A) no change B) increase C) decrease but does not become zero
D) reduces to zero
18. At what height over the earth’s pole, the free fall acceleration decreases by one percent (Re = 6400km)
A) 32 km B) 80 km C) 1.253 km D) 64 km
19. If the force inside the earth surface varies as rn, where r is the distance of body from the centre of earth, then the
value of n will be
A) –1 B) –2 C) 1 D) 2
20. A satellite which is geostationary in a particular orbit is taken to another orbit. Its distance from the centre of
earth in new orbit is two times of the earlier orbit. The time period in second orbit is ......... hours.
A) 4.8 B) 48 2 C) 24 D) 24 2

163
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

21. The mass of the earth is 6.00 × 1024 kg and that of the moon is 7.40 × 1022 kg. The constant of gravitation
G = 6.67 × 10–11 Nm2 kg–2. The potential energy of the system is –7.79 ×1028 Joules, the mean distance
between the earth and moon is = ........... meter.
A) 3.80 × 108 B) 3.37 × 108 C) 7.60 × 108 D) 1.90 × 102
22. Escape velocity of a body of mass 1 kg on a planet is 100 ms–1. Gravitational potential energy of the body at
the planet is = ............J
A) –5000 B) – 1000 C) –2400 D) 5000
23. What should be the speed with which the earth have to rotate on its axis so that a person on the equator would
weighs (3/5)th as much as present? Given equatorial radius is R.

A) 2g / 5R B) 2g /  5g  C) 2 R / 5 g  D) 2g/5R
24. If the moon is to escape from the gravitational field of the earth forever, it will require a velocity
A) 11.2 km/s B) less than 11.2 km/s
C) slightly more than 11.2 km/s D) 22.4 km/s
LEVEL II
1. The distance of the moon and earth is D the mass of earth is 81 times the mass of moon. At what distance from
the center of the earth, the gravitational force will be zero
D 12D 4D 9D
A) B) C) D)
2 3 3 10
2. The radius of the Earth is about 6400 km and that of the Mars is 3200 km. The mass of the Earth is about 10
times the mass of the Mars. An object weighs 200 N on the surface of Earth, its weight on the surface of Mars
will be
A) 8 N B) 20 N C) 40 N D) 80 N
3. A particle of mass 20 g experiences a gravitational force of 4 N along +ve X-direction. The gravitational field
at that point (magnitude) is
A) 50 N kg–1 B) 100 N kg–1 C) 200 N kg–1 D) 150 N kg–1
4. There are two bodies of masses 100,000 kg and 1000 kg separated by a distance of 1 m. At what distance
from the smaller body, the intensity of gravitational field will be zero?
1 1 1 10
A) m B) m C) m D) m
9 10 11 11
5. If the change in the value of g at a height h above the surface of earth is same as at a depth d below it, then (both
d and h being much smaller than the radius of the earth)
h
A) d  B) d = h C) d = 2h D) d = h2
2
6. A satellite of mass m is revolving round the earth at a height R above the surface of the earth. If g is the
gravitational field intensity at the earth’s surface and R is the radius, the K.E. of the satellite will be:

mgR mgR
A) B) C) mgR D) 2mgR
4 2
164
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

7. A geo-stationary satellite is orbiting around earth at height of 30,000 km in circular orbit. The radius of the
earth is taken as 6000 km. The geo-stationary satellite comes back to its position after one revolution in exactly
24 hours. Let the acceleration due to gravity (g) be 10 m/s2 and mass of satellite be 1000 kg; calculate the work
done in 12 hours when moving under gravitational force.

A) 1.36  1014 J B) 2  7.21014 J C) 1.8 1014 J D) 0 J

8. The figure shows elliptical orbit of a planet m about the sun s. The shaded area SCD is twice the shaded area
SAB. If t1 is the time for the planet to move from C and D and t2 is the time to move from A to B then

m v
C
B

S
A
D

A) t1  t 2 B) t1  4t 2 C) t1  2t 2 D) t1 = t2
9. Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve round a planet in coplanar circular orbits in the same sense. Their periods of
revolution are 1 h and 8h respectively. The radius of orbit of S1 is 104 km. The speed of S2 relative to S1 when
S2 is closest to S1, is ............... km h–1.
A) 2 × 104 B)  104 C) 2  10 4 D) 104
10. A satellite moving in a circular path of radius r around the earth has a time period T. If its radius slightly increases
by 4%, then percentage change in its time period is .............
A) 1% B) 6% C) 3% D) 9%

11. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth’s surface, the gain in potential energy of the mass ‘m’ at a
height equal to three times the radius R of the earth will be

1 1 3
A) mgR B) mgR C) mgR D) mgR
2 3 4
12. The escape velocity of a body from earth’s surface is Ve. The escape velocity of the same body from a height
equal to 7 R from earth’s surface will be

Ve Ve Ve Ve
A) B) C) D)
2 2 2 2 4

1 1
13. Given mass of the moon is of the mass of the earth and corresponding radius is of the earth. If escape
81 4
velocity on the earth surface is 11.2 kms–1 the value of same on the surface of moon is = ........... kms–1.
A) 0.14 B) 0.5 C) 2.5 D) 5

165
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

14. A satellite with kinetic energy E is revolving round the earth in a circular orbit. The minimum additional K.E.
required for it to escape into outer space is

E
A) 2 E B) 2E C) D) E
2
15. The acceleration due to gravity on a planet is 1.96 ms–2. If it is safe to jump from a height of 3 m on the earth,
the corresponding height on the planet will be
A) 3 m B) 6 m C) 9 m D) 15 m
16. An artificial satellite revolves around the earth in a circular orbit with a speed v. If m is the mass of the satellite,
the total energy is:

1 1 3 2
mv 2 B)  mv D)   mv
2
A) C) –mv2
2 2 2
17. A satellite is orbiting around the earth. The centripetal force on the satellite is F. The gravitational force of the
earth on the satellite is also F. The net force on the satellite is:

F
A) F B) zero C) 2F D)
2
18. A satellite is moving around the earth with speed v in a circular orbit of radius r. If the orbit radius is decreased
by 1%, the speed of the satellite will
A) increase by 1% B) increase by 0.5% C) decrease by 1% D) decrease by 0.5%
19. A planet is revolving in an elliptical orbit around the sun. Its closest distance from the sun is r and the farthest
distance is 3 r/2. If the velocity of the planet nearest to the sun is v and that farthest away from the sun be V,
v
then is:
V

2 3 4 9
A) B) C) D)
3 2 9 4
20. If the radius of the earth were to shrink by two percent, its mass remaining the same, the acceleration due to
gravity on the earth’s surface would
A) decrease by 2% B) increase by 2% C) increase by 4% D) decrease by 4%
21. At what height above the earth’s surface does the force of gravity decrease by 10%? The radius of the earth is
6400 km
A) 345.60 km B) 687.20 km C) 1031.8 km D) 12836.80 km
22. The ratio of the KE required to be given to the satellite to escape earth’s gravitational field to the KE required
to be given so that the satellite moves in a circular orbit just above earth’s surface is :
A) one B) half C) two D) infinity
23. The true weight of an object in a geostationary satellite whose weight at N pole is 10 N is
A) zero B) 10 N C) 2.3 N D) 0.23 N

166
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

LEVEL III
More than one correct.
1. A comet is revolving around the sun in a highly elliptical orbit. Which of the following will remain constant
throughout its orbit?
A) Kinetic energy B) Potential energy C) Total energy D) Angular momentum
2. An object is taken from a point P to another point Q in a gravitational field,
A) assuming the earth to be spherical, if both P and Q lie on earth’s surface the work done is zero
B) If P is on earth’s surface and Q above it, the work done is minimum when it is taken along the straight line
PQ.
C) The work done depends only on the positions of P and Q and is independent of the path along which the
particle is taken.
D) there is no network done if the object is taken from P to Q and then brought back to P, along any path
3. The total energy of a satellite of mass m moving with speed v around the earth of mass M in a circular orbit of
radius r is directly proportional to
A) m B) M C) v D) r
Passage Comprehension
A body moving in an orbit around the earth is called earth’s satellite. The moon is the natural satellite of the
earth. The first artificial (or man-made) satellite was put into earth’s orbit in 1956. Artificial satellites are put
into orbit at an altitude of a few hundred kilometers. The satellite is carried in a rocket which is launched from
the earth with a velocity less than the escape velocity. The escape velocity is the velocity with which a body
must be projected in order that it may escape the gravitational pull of the earth. When the rocket has achieved
the desired height, the satellite is released horizontally by imparting to it a very high speed so that it remains
moving in a nearly circular orbit around the earth. This velocity is called the orbital velocity which is about 8
km/s for a satellite a few hundred kilometers above the earth.
4. The escape velocity of a rocket fired from the earth depends upon.
A) Mass of the rocket B) Volume of fuel in the rocket
C) Acceleration due to gravity of the earth D) The direction in which the rocket is fired.
5. The centripetal force necessary to keep a satellite in a circular orbit around the earth is provided by
A) A continuous ejection of hot gases by the satellite.
B) The gravitational attraction between the earth and the satellite
C) The gravitational pull of the sun exerted on the satellite.
D) The weightlessness of the satellite
6. An artificial satellite is orbiting the earth at an altitude of 500 km. A bomb is released from the satellite. This
bomb will:
A) Explode due to the heat generated by the friction of air
B) Fall freely on the earth
C) Escape into outer space
D) Orbit the earth along with the satellite
167
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Matrix Match.
7. Match the columns I and II.
Column I Column II
A) Kinetic energy of a body p) must be zero
projected from surface of earth,
at large distance from surface of
earth.
B) Gravitational potential energy of q) may be zero
a bound system
C) Change in potential energy of a r) positive
point mass if left free to itself,
with time
D) Change in areal velocity of earth s) may be negative
as earth moves from apogee
towards perigee
t) must be negative
8. Match the following. (2019)
Column I Column II
–2
A) Earth p) 25.95 ms
–2
B) Jupiter q) 3.7 ms
C) Saturn r) 9.8 ms–2
–2
D) Mars s) 11.08 ms
Integer-Type Questions
9. The radius of earth is about 6400 km and that of mass is 3200 km. The mass of the earth is 10 times of mars.
An object weighs 20 N on Earth’s surface, and then its weight on mars would be?
10. By what factor the force between two objects change, when the mass of one object is doubled?
11. An artificial satellite is orbiting at a height of 1800 km from earth’s surface. The earth’s radius is 6300 km and
g = 10 m/s2 on its surface. What is the radial acceleration.
12. Two satellites of a planet have periods 32 days and 256 days. If the radius of the orbit of the former is R, the
orbital radius of the latter is
13. An earth satellite S has an orbit radius which is 4 times that of a communication satellite C. The period of
revolution of S is
Reasoning Type.
Each question contains Statement I and Statement II. Of these Statements, mark correct choice if
A) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
B) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
14. Statement I : Value of g does not depend upon mass of the body.
Statement II : Acceleration due to gravity is a constant quantity.

168
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

15. Statement I : Astronauts in a stable orbit around the earth are in a weightless condition.
Statement II : The satellite and its contents are falling freely at the same rate.
16. Statement I : During a journey from the earth to the moon and back, maximum fuel is spent to overcome the
earth’s gravity at take off.
Statement II : Earth’s mass is much greater than that of the moon.

NTSE PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS

1. If the mass and radius of earth become half and one-fourth of the present in values then the value of acceleration
due to gravity will become: (2007)
1 1
A) g B) g C) 4 g D) 8 g
8 4
2. The escape velocity on the earth is 11.2 km/s. A planet has twice the radius of earth and same mean density
as earth. Then the escape velocity on planet in km/s will be: (2016)
A) 5.6 B) 11.2 C) 22.4 D) 16.5
3. Suppose universal gravitational constant starts to decrease, then: (2014)
A) length of the year will increases
B) earth will follow a spiral path of decreasing radius
C) kinetic energy will remain constant
D) all of the above
4. Value of acceleration due to gravity of earth is maximum: (2014)
A) At centre of earth B) At surface of earth
C) At a height of 50 km from earth’s surface D) At a height of 12 km from earth’s surface
5. Neglecting the rotation of the earth, if suddenly the attractive power of the earth drops to zero a man standing
on the earth will: (2014)
A) Fly up B) slide along the surfaces
C) move D) stand unaffected
6. A planet of volume V and mass m has gravitational acceleration g on its surface. If it expands to 8 time its
original volume, what will be the acceleration due to gravity: (2015)
g g
A) 4 g B) 2 g C) D)
4 8
7. A planet has density  , radius R and acceleration due to gravity as g. If the radius of the planet were doubled,
keeping the density same, the acceleration due to gravity at the surface will be : (2015)
g
A) 4 g B) 2 g C) g D)
2
8. The mass of an object is 10 kg on earth. So we can say: (2015)
A) Its weight on earth is 10 N B) Its weight on Earth is 1.67 N
C) Its weight on moon is 10 N D) Its mass on moon is 10 kg

169
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

9. The weight of a body of mass 15 kg on moon is: (2017)

A) 24.5 N B) 2.45 N C) 245 N D) 0.245 N

g
10. Let M denotes the mass of earth and let R denotes its radius. The ratio at earth’s surface is (2108)
G

R2 M M R
A) B) C) D)
M R2 R M

11. The mass of earth is 80 times that of moon and its diameter is double that of moon. If the value of acceleration
due to gravity on earth is 9.8 m/s2, then the value of acceleration due to gravity on moon will be : (2017)

A) 0.98 ms 2 B) 0.49 ms 2 C) 9.8 ms 2 D) 4.9 ms 21

12. When a body is orbiting near the surface of the earth, what will be the ratio of its orbital velocity to the escape
velocity from earth? (2018)

A) 1: 2 B) 2 :1 C) 2 : 1 D) 1 : 2

13. The mass of a planet is twice and its radius is three times that of the earth. The weight of a body, which has a
mass of 5 kg. On that planet will be (2019)
A) 11.95 N B) 10.88 N C) 9.88 N D) 20.99 N
14. How much time the satellite will take to complete one revolution around the earth, if velocity of satellite is 3.14
km/s and its height above earth’s surface is 3600 km. (Radius of earth is 6400 km) (2019)
A) 2000 s B) 20000 s C) 1000 s d) 10000 s
15. A planet in orbit sweeps out an angle of 160o from March - May, When it is at an average distance of 140
million km from sun. If the planet sweeps out an angle of 10o from October - December, then the average
distance from sun is .......... (2019)

A) 56  105 km B) 56  106 km C) 56 107 km D) 56  108 km

16. Two planets ‘A’ and ‘B’ of same mass and same radius are shown in the figure 1 and 2 are densities of the
materials in the planets and 1  2 . If the accelerations due to gravity on the surfaces of the planets A and
B are gA and gg respectively, then

'A'
   

A) Given information is not sufficient B) gA > gg

C) gA < gg D) gA = gg

170
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

CHAPTER - 7
FLUIDS

Introduction
A small iron nail sinks in water, while a huge ship of heavy mass floats on water. An Astronaut wears a special
suit while travelling in space. Why do deep sea fishes die when brought to shallow water. A submarine can sink in
water as well as float. The answers to all these questions lie in studying the fluid pressure and the principles involved.
Matter exists in three states - solid, liquid and gas. Solids have definite shape and size, but liquids and gases
have no definite shape. Liquids and gases have the property of flowing - begins to flow when force is applied on it.
So they are generally called fluids. The property of fluids at rest is studied in hydrostatics and the branch which
studies fluids in motion is studied in hydrodynamics.
Molecules of a fluid are in random motion due to their thermal velocities and they collide with the walls of the
container during their motion. During collision they suffer a change in momentum and consequently they apply a
force on the walls of the container. The normal force applied on the walls of the container is called thrust. SI unit of
thrust is Newton.
Pressure
The normal force (thrust) exerted by a liquid at rest per unit area of the surface in contact with it is called
pressure of liquid.
Thrust
Pressure P 
Area
Unit of pressure N/m2
1 N/m2 is also known as pascal.
1 pascal = 1 N/m2
A large unit of pressure is Bar, 1 bar = 105 Pa
Fluids exert pressure in all possible directions. The force exerted on the lateral sides of the container of the
liquid is equal in all directions at a horizontal level and thus net force acting on the walls is zero. There is a resultant
force exerted on the bottom portion of the beaker by liquid. If a is the area of cross section of beaker and F is the
force exerted by the liquid on the bottom of the beaker, then pressure
Force F
P 
Area a
The force is equal to weight of the liquid, w = mg, where m is the mass of the liquid and g is acceleration due
to gravity.
Mass m = volume × density
= area × height of liquid column × density of liquid = a  h  
171
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

 Weight w  ahg
ahg
 Pressure P   h g
a
 Pressure exerted by a liquid at a point inside it is directly proportional to (1) height of the liquid column (h)
and (2) density of the liquid (  )
1
P for a constant force.
A

It means that pressure is very large when area is very small. To reduce pressure, Area has to be increased.
This principle is used in laying down sleepers under railway track.
Atmospheric pressure is measured in terms of the height of mercury.
Average atmospheric pressure is
1 atm = 76 cm or mercury column
= 0.76 × 13.6 × 103 × 9.8 = 1.013 × 105 Nm–2 = 1.013 × 105 Pa
Measurement of atmospheric pressure
A barometer is used to determine atmospheric pressure. A pure liquid of high density (Mercury) is filled in a
glass tube of length about 1 m. The tube is then inverted and dipped in a beaker containing mercury. Now we can
see that mercury remains in the tube upto a height of h above the level in the beaker. This height h gives a measure of
the atmospheric pressure. The length of mercury column is, h = 76 cm. So the pressure exerted by the atmosphere
is 76 cm of Hg.

vacuum

Mercury h = 76 cm

172
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Manometer
A device used to measure pressure of a gas is called a manometer. It consists of a U-tube with uniform
diameter, open at both ends. It contains liquid in both arms of the tube.
At normal pressure (fig. A) liquid level in both limbs remain at the same level. When a pressure is to be
measured it is connected to one limb (A) of the tube. Depending on the pressure of the gas the level of liquid rises or
lowers in the open limb. The difference in levels (h) in the height of liquid column will be proportional to the pressure
applied at the end P of the tube. The pressure P  p0  hg

P p0 C

h
p0 p0 p0
A B A B p0

Normal Pressure
(A) (B)

Pascals Law - Transmission of fluid pressure.

An increase in pressure of any point inside a liquid at rest, is transmitted equally and without any change in all
directions to every other point in the liquid. This law is used in the development of hydraulic brakes in automobiles,
Bramah Press etc.
F1 F2

A1 A2

The equipment consists of two tubes of different area of cross section, A2 > A1.
A small force F1 is applied at the limb A1 produces pressure P in the liquid.
F1
P
A1

F2
This pressure is Transmitted equally to the other limb of the liquid. At the other limb P  A
2

F1 A 
 F2  P  A 2   A 2  F1   2  Since A2 is > A1, F2 > F1
A1  A1 
173
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

F2 will be greater than F1. So a small force applied at one end produce a large force at the other end of the
tube which is the principle of hydraulic breaks and Bramah press.
Example 1 : The area of cross section of two cylinders in Bramah press are 10 cm2 and 50 cm2 respectively. To
move a weight of 100 N placed on the piston of larger area what force is to be applied on smaller area.
a1 = 10 cm2, a2 = 50 cm2, f2 = 100 N
F1 F2
p 
a1 a 2

F2  a1 100  10
F1    20N
a2 50
Height of atmosphere can be calculated assuming density of air.
Let atmospheric pressure = 1.013 × 105 Pa and density of air = 1.3 kg/m–3, then p  hg ,

p 1.013 105
h   7951 m  8 km
g 1.3  9.8
Upthrust or Buoyant force
When a body is immersed into a fluid completely or partly, the body experiences an upward force by the fluid.
It is the force acting on the immersed body by the displaced liquid, and is called the upthrust or buoyant force. The
property of the fluid to exert buoyant force on an object immersed is known as buoyancy.
As the body is completely immersed in the liquid, the body displaces liquid, whose volume is equal to volume
of the body.
Thus upthrust = F = [volume of liquid displaced (v)] × [density of liquid (  )] × [Acceleration due to gravity g]
F  vg = weight of liquid displaced.
Thus upthrust on a body immersed in a liquid is equal to weight of the liquid displaced.
Archimedis principle
When a body is partially or completely immersed in a fluid, it experiences an upthrust which is equal to the
weight of the fluid displaced by it. “Due to this upthrust it apparently loses a part of its weight and this apparent loss
of weight is equal to the upthrust.
For a body completely or partially immersed in a fluid, upthrust = weight of the fluid displaced = apparent loss
of weight of the body.
Density
The mass per unit volume of an object is called density. The unit of density is kg/m3 in SI and gm/cm3 in cgs
system.
Relative density or specific gravity
The ratio of density of a substance to the density of water at 4oC is defined as the relative density.
Density of substance
R.D. of a solid  Density of water at 4o C

R.D. can be found in different ways.

174
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

weight of a certain volume of substance in air

R.D. =
weight of same volume of water

weight of solid in air

=
weight of water displaced by the solid

weight of solid in air

=
Apparant loss of weight of the body in water

Apparant loss of weight of a body in liquid

R.D. of a liquid = Apparant loss of weight of body in water

Example 2 : Mass of a body is 5 kg, and its volume is 625 cm3. Find Relative density.
mass = 5000 gm
Mass 5000
Density =   8 gm / cm 3
Volume 625
 R.D. of the body = 8
Example 3 : A body weighs 100 gm in air and 72 gm when completely immersed in a liquid and 62 gm when
completely immersed in water. Find the R. density of solid and liquid.

weight of solid in air 100  g 100

R.D. of solid = loss of weight of solid in water  100  62  g  38  2.63

loss of weight of solid in liquid 100  72

R.D. of liquid  loss of weight of solid in water  100  68  0.736

Density of liquid = R.D. of liquid × density of water = 0.736 × 103 = 736 kg/m3
Example 4 : The mass of a body is 3 kg and its volume is 375 cm3. Find its density and relative density.
Solution : Mass of the body = 3 kg
Volume of the body = 375 cm3 = 375 × 10–6 m3.
3
Density of the body = 6
 8  103 kg/m 3
375 10

Density of body 8 103

R.D. of the body   8
Density of water 1 103
Example 5 : The specific gravity of gold is 19. Find the mass of a gold ornament that displaces 30 cm3 of water
when immersed in it.
Solution : Sp gravity of gold = R.D. of gold = 19
 Density of gold = 19 gm/cm3
Volume of water displaced when gold is immersed in it = 30 cm3 = volume of gold ornament.
Mass of gold body = volume × density = 30 × 19 = 570 gm

175
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 6 : A body weigh 85 gm is air, 77 gm when completely immersed in a liquid and 74 gm when completely
immersed in water. Find the density of liquid.
Solution : Mass of body in air = 85 gm
Mass of body in liquid = 77 gm
Mass of body in water = 76 gm
loss of wt.of body in liquid
Density of liquid  loss of wt. of body in water  Density of water

85  77
  1 gm/cm3  0.727 gm/cm3
85  74
LAW OF FLOATATION
Law of floatation is an extension of Archimedes principle.
When a body is immersed partially or wholly in a fluid, then the various forces acting on the body are (i) upward
thrust (B) acting at the centre of buoyancy and whose magnitude is equal to the weight of the liquid displaced and (ii)
the weight of the body (W) which acts vertically downwards through its centre of gravity.

(i) When W > B, the body will sink in the liquid.

(ii) When W = B, then the body will remain in equilibrium inside the liquid.
(iii) When W < B, then the body will come upto the surface of the liquid in such a way that the weight of the liquid
displaced due to it balance the weight of the body immersed inside the liquid.
Thus law of floation is defined as follows:
Definition:
A body floats in a liquid if weight of the liquid displaced by the immersed portion of the body is equal to the weight
of the body.
(a) Special features of floating body:
(i) Floating body is a weightless body: As the weight acting downwards is neutralized by the buoyant force
acting upwards, a floating body is a weightless body. We can also say that the apparent weight of the floating
body is zero.
(ii) Loss of weight of a floating body is complete: As the floating body is weightless, it means it has lost its
weight completely.
 loss of weight for a floating body = Real weight – Apparent weight = Real weight – 0 = Real weight.
(b) Relation between Density of Solid and Liquid
Let 1 be the density of the solid whose volume is V1 . Let  2 be the density of the liquid and the volume of
the portion of the solid immersed in the liquid be V2.
176
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Now, weight of the floating solid = weight of the liquid displaced.

1 V2
i.e., V11g  V22 g    V
2 1

Density of solid Volume of the immersed portion of the solid

or Density of liquid  Total volume of the solid
= Fraction of volume of body immersed in liquid.
(c) Equilibrium in Floating Bodies
From law of floatation, we know that a body will float in a liquid when its weight W is equal to the weight w
of the liquid displaced by the immersed part of the body. But this does not necessarily indicate that the body will be
in equilibrium. A body will be in equilibrium only if the resultant of all the forces and couples acting on the body is
zero. If W and w act along different lines, they will then from a couple which will tend to rotate the body. Thus, a
floating body can be in equilibrium if no couple acts on it. It will be so if the line of action of W and w is along the
same vertical straight line. Thus, there will be equilibrium of floating bodies if the following conditions are fulfilled:
(i) A body can float if the weight of the liquid displaced by the immersed part of body must be equal to the weight
of the body.
(ii) A body can be in equilibrium if the centre of gravity of the body and centre of buoyancy must be along the same
vertical line.
(iii) The body will be in stable equilibrium if centre of gravity of body lies vertically below the centre of buoyancy
and in the unstable equilibrium if centre of gravity lies vertically above the centre of buoyancy.
NOTE:
When an ice block is floating in water in a vessel, then the level of water in the vessel will not change when the whole
ice melts into water.
When an ice block is floating in a liquid in a vessel and ice completely melts, then the following cases may arise for
the level of liquid in the vessel.
(i) If density of liquid is greater than that of water i.e., L  W , the level of liquid plus water will rise.

(ii) If density of liquid is less than the density of water i.e.,  L   W , the level of liquid plus water will decrease.

(iii) If density of liquid is equal to the density of water i.e., L  W , the level of liquid plus water will remain
unchanged.
STREAMLINE FLOW
The path taken by a particle in flowing fluid is called its line of flow. In the case of steady flow all the particles
passing through a given point follow the same path and hence we have a unique line of flow passing through a given
point which is also called streamline.

Streamlines
A C vC
B
vA vB
Tube of flow
(a) (b)

177
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Characteristics of Streamline :
(i) A tangent at any point on the stream line gives the direction of the velocity of the fluid particle at that point.
(ii) Two steamlines never intersect each other.
Laminar flow
If the liquid flows over a horizontal surface in the form of layers of different velocities, then the flow of liquid is
called Laminar flow. The particle of one layer do not go to another layer. In general, Laminar flow is a streamline
flow.
Turbulent flow
A flow of fluid in which velocity of all particles crossing a given point is not same and the motion of the fluid
becomes disorderly or irregular is called turbulent flow.

Equation of continuity
The equation of continuity expresses the law of conservation of mass in fluid dynamics.
a1v1 = a2v2, a is the area of cross section of the tube and v is the velocity of liquid flow.

A
a2,v 2
a1, v1
In general av = constant. This is called equation of continuity and states that as the area of cross section of the
tube of flow becomes larger, the liquid’s (fluid) speed becomes smaller and vice-versa.
Viscosity
During the steady flow of a liquid, different layers of the liquid exert a frictional force to the adjacent layers, due
to which, there is a change of velocity between the adjacent layers. This frictional force existing between the adjacent
layers of liquid is called viscosity.
Due to this the top layer of liquid flow have maximum velocity and bottom layer have minimum velocity.
Different liquids will be having different viscosity, when temperature increases viscosity decreases, when viscosity is
larger mobility of the liquid decreases viscosity of oil is greater than that of water.
The viscous force between two layers of a liquid depends on velocity between two layers dv, proportional to
the Area of the layers (A) and inversely proportional to the distance between the layers (dx)
A dv A dv
 F or F  
dx dx

where is the coefficient of viscosity..
dv
is the velocity gradient
dx
178
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

dv
When  1 , when A = 1 m2, then F  
dx
 Coefficient of viscosity of a liquid is equal to the tangential force required to maintain a unit velocity gradient
between two parallel layers of liquid each of area unity.
The unit of coefficient of viscosity is Nm–2s or Poiseuille
Surface Tension
Liquids in small quantity at rest, free from external forces, always tend to have a spherical shape. For a given
volume, a sphere has the least surface area. So the free surface of every liquid remains spherical. In doing so the free
surface of the liquid remains as a stretched membrane having tension in all directions. This tension on the free surface
of the liquid is called surface tension. Surface Tension is the property of the liquid by virtue of which the free surface
of liquid tends to have minimum surface area and it acts as if covered with a stretched membrane.
Surface tension is measured as the force acting per unit length on an imaginary line drawn tangential to the
liquid surface
F
s  , unit Nm–1
l
Due to surface tension a small liquid drop takes a spherical shape, we can float an iron needle carefully placed
on the surface of liquid, water can be used in combing hair.
The reason for surface tension is the inter molecular force acting between different molecules of the liquid.
Due to surface tension molecules on the surface have more potential energy. Surface Tension may also be
defined as the work done in increasing the surface area of a liquid surface by unity against force of surface tension,
at constant temperature.
work done
 surface tension 
surface area
Application of S.T.
1. Oil spreads over the surface of water, as ST of oil is smaller than that of water.
2. Cleaning of clothes by soap solution is achieved due to S.T. S.T. of soap solution is very low, so it can spread
over large area and clothes can be washed more effectively.
3. Stromy waves at sea can be calmed by pouring oil on sea water.

179
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

FLUIDS
LEVEL I [HOMEWORK]
1. Among the following liquids, the pressure inside them at a given depth is the highest in ..... at a constant
temperature.
A) fresh water B) petrol C) sea water D) alcohol
2. A liquid whose density is twice the density of mercury is used as a barometric liquid. Then one atmosphere
pressure equals ...... cm of the liquid.
A) 76 B) 38 C) 152 D) 380
3. The pressure exerted by a liquid column at the bottom of the container at a point inside a fluid
A) does not depend on the area of the container
B) dependent on the density of the fluid
C) equal in all directions
D) all the above are true
4. A sudden fall in atmospheric pressure by a large value indicates ...........
A) Arrival of storm B) Arrival of dust-storm C) Fair weather D) None of the above
5. A manometer is connected to a gas container. Then the mercury level rises by 2 cm in the arm of the manometer
which is not connected to the container. If the atmospheric pressure is 76 cm of Hg then the pressure of the gas
is ....... cm of Hg.
A) 80 B) 76 C) 72 D) 78
6. The two thigh bones (femurs) each of cross-sectional area 10 cm2 support the upper part of a human body of
mass 40 kg. Estimate the average pressure sustained by the femurs. g = 10 m/s2.

A) 2  105 Nm 2 B) 3  105 Nm 2 C) 3.5  102 Nm 2 D) 4  105 Nm 2

7. Readings of a barometer at the top and ground floors of a building are 75.000 cm. and 75.125 cm. respectively.
The density of mercury is 13600 kg/m3 and that of air is 1.36 kg/m3. What is the height of the building?
A) 8.3 m B) 18.7 m C) 9.8 m D) 12.5 m
8. An ice cube containing a glass ball is floating on the surface of water contained in a trough. The whole of the ice
melts, the level of water in the trough
A) rises B) falls C) remains unchanged D) first falls and then rises
9. A block of aluminium of mass 1 kg and volume 3.6 × 10–4 m3 is suspended from a string and then completely
immersed in a container of water. The decrease in tension in the string after immersion is (use g = 10 ms–2)
A) 9.8 N B) 6.2 N C) 3.6 N D) 1.0 N
10. When equal quantities of an oil, water and mercury are poured into a beaker, the order in which the liquids
arrange themselves from bottom to top is
A) mercury, water, oil B) water, mercury, oil C) water, oil, mercury D) mercury, oil, water
180
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

11. A substance floats in water, but sinks in coconut oil. The density of the substance
A) is less than the density of water B) is greater than the density of oil
C) Both (A) and (B) D) Cannot be decided based on the given information
12. A spring balance shows 100 gf, reading when a metallic sphere is suspended from its hook. When the balance
is lowered such that the sphere is immersed in water, the reading shown by the balance is 75 gf. The relative
density of the material of the sphere is (gf is gm force, equal to mass of 1 gm multiplied by acceleration due to
gravity.)
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4
13. A piece of wax weighs 18.8 gm wt. in air. A piece of metal weighs 17.03 gm wt. in water. Metal is tied to wax
and both of them together in water weigh 15.23 gm. Find the R.D. of wax.
A) 0.85 B) 0.91 C) 1.1 D) 1.25
14. In a hydrometer, the floatation bulb is large in size compared to the size of the gravity bulb because
A) it lowers the centre of gravity B) it decreases the buoyancy of liquids
C) it displaces a large amount of liquid and thus does not allow the hydrometer to sink completely in the liquid
D) none of these
15. An object just floats in water. If common salt is added into the water.
A) the volume of the object immersed in the liquid decreases B) the object sinks
C) the object first sinks and then floats up D) cannot be determined
16. A man is sitting in a boat which is floating in a pond. If the man drinks some water from the pond, what will
happen to the level of water in the pond.
A) The level of water in the pond remain unchanged B) level of water will increase
C) level of water goes down D) none of the above
17. Total area of cross-section is 0.25 m2. If blood is flowing at the rate of 100 cm3/s then the average velocity of
flow of blood through capillaries (in mm/s) is
A) 0.4 B) 4 C) 25 D) 400
18. A metal block of volume 500 cm3 and density 2 g cm–3 is suspended from a spring balance and one fourth of its
volume is immersed in water. The reading on the spring balance is ........ N. (Take g = 10 ms–2)
A) 8.575 B) 10.175 C) 500 D) 8.750
19. A cube of wood floating in water supports a 200 g mass resting at the centre of its top face. When the mass is
removed, the cube rises 2 cm. Find the volume of the cube.

A) 1.5  103 cm 3 B) 2.8  103 cm 3 C) 103 cm 3 D) 104 cm 3

20. In a stream line (laminar flow) the velocity of flow at any point in the liquid
A) does not vary with time B) may vary in direction but not in magnitude
C) may vary in magnitude but not in direction D) may vary both in magnitude and direction

181
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

LEVEL II
1. Two stretched membranes of area 10 cm and 20 cm2 are held horizontally in a liquid, at the same height. The
2

ratio of pressures on them is .......

A) 1 : 2 B) 2 : 1 C) 1 : 4 D) 1 : 1
2. At a higher altitudes, the atmospheric pressure is lesser as, at higher altitudes
A) the length of air column exerting the pressure is less B) density of air decreases
C) acceleration due to gravity decreases D) all the above
3. In a mercury barometer, if a tube containing mercury is tilted, then
A) vertical height of the mercury column remains same
B) the length of mercury column in the tube increases
C) the vertical height of the mercury column decreases
D) both (A) and (B)
4. What is the pressure on a swimmer 10 m below the surface of lake? g = 10 ms–2; atmospheric pressure
 1.01105 Pa
A) 2 atm B) 1 atm C) 3 atm D) 2.5 atm
5. Find the pressure at the tip of a drawing pin of area 0.2 mm square if it is pushed against a board with a force
of 5 kg wt. [Use g = 10 m/s2]
A) 2.25 × 1010 Pa B) 2.25 × 108 Pa C) 2.5 × 108 Pa D) 1.95 × 108 Pa
6. The area of smaller piston of a hydraulic press is 2 cm square and that of large piston is 20 cm square. How
much weight can be raised on the larger piston when a force 200 kg f is exerted on the smaller piston?
g  10 m/s 2

A) 2.0 103 kg f B) 2  104 kg f C) 2.8  103 kg f D) 3.5  103 kg f

7. The area of cross-section of the wider tube shown in figure is 800 cm2. If a mass of 12 kg is placed on the
massless piston, what is the difference in the level of water in two tubes.

A) 10 cm B) 15 cm C) 21 cm D) 18 cm
8. The neck and bottom of a bottle are 2 cm and 20 cm in diameter respectively. If the cork is pressed with a force
of 1.2 kgf in the neck of the bottle, calculate the force exerted on the bottom of the bottle.
A) 120 kgf B) 135 kgf C) 85 kgf D) 108 kgf
9. A glass of water upto a height of 10 cm has a bottom of area 10 cm2, top of area 30 cm2 and volume 1 litre. The
downward force exerted by water on the bottom is ..... (Taking g = 10 m/s2, density of water = 103 kg/m3;
atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 105 N/m2)
A) 100 N B) 102 N C) 110 N D) 120 N

182
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

10. A tank 5 m high is half filled with water and then filled to the top with oil of density 0.85 g/sec. What is the
pressure at the bottom of the tank due to these liquids.
A) 3.25  103 N/m 2 B) 4.53 104 N/m 2 C) 2.85  104 N/m 2 D) None of these
11. A 20 N metal block is suspended by a spring balance. A beaker containing some water is placed on the
weighing machine which reads 36 N. The spring balance is now lowered so that the block gets immersed in the
water. The spring balance now reads 16 N. What will be the reading of the weighing machine?
A) 36 N B) 20 N C) 40 N D) 16 N
12. The density of the atmosphere at sea level is 1.29 kg/m3. Assume that it does not change with altitude. Then
how high would the atmosphere extend? g = 9.8 ms–2. Atmospheric pressure = 1.013 × 105 Pa.
A) 5809 m B) 7989 m C) 8541 m D) 8375 m
13. A U-tube is partially filled with water. Oil which does not mix with water is poured into one side until water rises
by 25 cm on the other side. If the density of oil be 0.8, the oil level will stand higher than the water level by
A) 6.25 cm B) 12.50 cm C) 31.75 cm D) 62.50 cm
14. A piece of material weighing 50.0 gram is coated with 6.3 gram of wax of sp. gravity 0.9. If the coated piece
weighs 16.3 gram in water, then the density of the material in g/cc is
A) 1.515 B) 2.112 C) 2.351 D) 4.613
15. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in water as shown in fig. The distances l and h are shown
there. After some time the coin falls into the water. Then

Coin

l
h

A) l decreases and h increases B) l increases and h decreases

C) both l and h increases D) both l and h decreases
16. A vessel contains oil (density 0.8 g cm–3) over mercury (density = 13.6 g cm–3). A homogeneous sphere floats
with half its volume immersed in mercury and the other half in oil. What is the density of material of sphere?
A) 0.85 gm cm–3 B) 7.2 gm cm–3 C) 8.5 gm cm–3 D) 8.5 × 103 gm cm–3
17. A wooden cube floating in water supports a mass 0.2 kg on its top. When the mass is removed the cube rises
by 2 cm. What is the side length of the cube? Density of water = 103 kg/m3.
A) 12 cm B) 15 cm C) 10 cm D) 8 cm
18. A piece of solid weighs 120 g in air, 80 g in water and 60 g in a liquid. The relative density of the solid and that
of the liquid are respectively.

3 3 3
A) 3, B) 2, C) ,2 D) 4, 3
2 4 2

183
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

19. A solid shell loses half of its weight in water. Relative density of shell is 5.0. What fraction of its volume is
hollow?

3 2 1 3
A) B) C) D)
5 5 4 4
20. A solid uniform ball having volume V and density  floats at the interface of two immiscible liquids as shown in
figure. The densities of the upper and lower liquids are 1 and  2 respectively, such that 1    2 . What
fraction of the volume of the ball will be in the lower liquid.

  2 1 1   1  
A)    B)    C)    D) 2
1 2 1 2 1 2

21. A block of wood floats in water with (4/5)th of its volume submerged. If the same block just floats in a liquid,
the density of liquid in (kg m–3) is
A) 1250 B) 600 C) 400 D) 800
22. The water level in a tank is 5 metres high. There is a hole of 1 cm2 cross-section at the bottom of the tank
through which water will leak initially at the rate of (g = 10 metres per sec2)
A) 10–3 metre3 per sec B) 10–4 metre3 per sec C) 10 metre3 per sec D) 10–2 metre3 per sec
23. A solid ball of density half that of water falls freely under gravity from a height of 19.6 m and then enters water.
Neglecting air resistance and viscosity effects in water, the depth upto which the ball will go is (g = 9.8 m/s2)
A) 19.6 m B) 9.8 m C) 14.7 m D) 12.7 m
24. Surface tension of a soap solution is 1.9 × 10–2 N/m. Work done in blowing a bubble of 2.0 cm diameter will be

A) 7.6  106  J B) 15.2 106   J C) 1.9 106   J D) 1 104   J

LEVEL III
More than one correct options.
1. With the rise in temperature, which of the following forces can never increase
A) friction B) elastic C) viscous D) surface tension force
2. When a body of density  and volume V is floating in a liquid of density 
A) its apparent weight is zero
B) its density  is less than that of liquid 
C) its loss in weight in liquid is V  g
D) its true weight is V  g
184
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

3. A piece of wood is floating in water kept in bottle. The bottle is connected to an air pump. When more air is
pushed into the bottle from the pump.
A) the thrust of air will increase B) the total thrust will remain unchanged
C) the thrust of water will decrease D) the wood piece will rise a little
4. A sample of metal weighs 210 g in air, 180 g in water and 120 g in liquid. Then Relative Density (RD) of
A) metal is 3 B) metal is 7 C) liquid is 3 D) liquid is 7
5. Some pieces of impurity (density =  ) is embedded in ice. This ice is floating in water. (density = w ). When
ice melts, level of water will

A) fall if    w B) remain unchanged, if   w

C) fall if   w D) rise if    w
6. A block is floating in a liquid as shown in figure. Suppose w = weight of block, P = pressure at bottom of block
and F = upthrust on the block. Now suppose container starts moving upward with some positive acceleration.
The new values are suppose w', P' and F' then

A) w' > w B) P' > P C) F' > F D) F' – w' = 0

Passage Comprehension
Passage I
If a body is immersed in a fluid, it experiences an upward force called the buoyant force. The magnitude of
buoyant force depends on (a) the size or volume of the body and (b) the density of the fluid. The necessary
condition for a body to float in a liquid is that the weight of the liquid displaced by the immersed portion of the
body must be equal to the weight of the body.
7. A block of wood floats in a liquid in a beaker with 3/4ths of its volume submerged under the liquid. If the beaker
is placed in an enclosure that is falling freely under gravity, the block will
A) float with 3/4ths of its volume submerged
B) float completely submerged
C) float with any fraction of its volume submerged
D) sink to the bottom

185
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

8. A piece of copper having an internal cavity weighs 264 g in air and 221 g in water. The density of copper is 8.8
g cm–3. What is the volume of the cavity?
A) 12 cm3 B) 13 cm3 C) 14 cm3 D) 15 cm3
Matrix Match.
9. Match the following.

Column I Column II
A) Water in a reservoir p) Pressure energy
B) Water flowing down from a height q) Potential energy
C) Water flowing on a horizontal ground r) Linear kinetic energy
D) Water flowing on a ground forming eddies s) Rotational kinetic energy

10. Match the following.

Column I Column II
A) Water supply in cities p) Pascal’s law
B) Hydraulic brake q) Archimede’s Principle
C) Sucking of a cool drink by using a straw r) Fluid pressure
D) Fish weighs less in water than in air s) Atmospheric pressure
E) Relative density of solids t) Upthrust

Integer Answer Type.

11. The reading of spring balance when a block is suspended from it in air, is 60 N. This reading is changed to 40 N
when the block is immersed in water. Find the specific gravity of the block.
12. A large block of ice 10 m thick with a vertical hole drilled through it is floating in a lake. The minimum length of
the rope required to scoop out a bucket full of water through the hole is (0.2 x)m. Find the value of x. Take
density of ice = 0.9 g/cm3.
13. A cubical block of wood of specific gravity 0.5 and chunk of concrete of specific gravity 2.5 are fastened
together. The ratio of the mass of wood to the mass of concrete, which makes the combination to float with its
entire volume submerged under water is (0.x). Find value of x.
Reasoning Type.
Each question contains Statement I and Statement II. Of these Statements, mark correct choice if
A) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
B) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true

186
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

14. Statement I : A needle placed carefully on the surface of water may float, whereas a ball of the same material
will always sink.
Statement II : The buoyancy on an object depends both on the material and shape of the object.
15. Statement I : A hydrogen filled balloon stops rising after it has attained a certain height in the sky.
Statement II : The atmospheric pressure decreases with height and becomes zero when maximum height is
attained.
16. Statement I : A block of wood is floating in a tank containing water. The apparent weight of the floating
block is equal to zero.
Statement II : Because the entire weight of the block is supported by the buoyant force (the upward thrust)
due to water.
NTSE PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS
1. Two thin circular discs of radii 3 cm and 4 cm respectively are placed separately at the bottom of a vessel
containing water. The ratio of thrusts acting on them will be : (2007)

A) 3 : 4 B) 4 : 3 C) 3:2 D) 9 : 16
2. When a body is immersed in a liquid, the buoyant force that acts on the body will be : (2014)
A) vertically downwards B) vertically upwards
C) horizontally right side D) horizontally left side
3. Ice is floating on water on a beaker when ice completely melts then level of water in beaker: (2014)
A) increases B) decreases
C) remains the same D) first increases decreases
4. A cork of mass m1 and a steel of mass m2 are tied to the ends of a massless string. The whole system is kept
in a liquid of density ‘  ’. 1 and  2 are densities of cork and steel respectively. Which of the following is
wrong? (2014)

 
A) The tension in the string T  m 2g  1    when the system is in equilibrium.
 2 

B) The cork is completely immersed in the liquid if  m1  m 2  12   m12  m 21  

m1 m 2  
C) The volume of submerged part of cork is equal to     1    when the system is in equilibrium
 2 

 
D) The system sinks if T  m1g   1
 1 
187
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. Pascal’s law states that pressure at every point of liquid in position of equilibrium is same if : (2015)
A) mass is constant B) force acts perpendicular at surface
C) gravitational effect is negligible D) all of the above
6. The volume of a substance is 20 cm3. The mass of the substances if its relative density is 2.5 will be (2016)
A) 5 g B) 50 g C) 500 g D) 5 kg
7. An aluminium sphere is dipped into water. If BI and BII are the buoyancy in water at 0oC and 40oC respectively:
A) BI < BII B) BI > BII (2015)
C) BI = BII D) BI > or < BII depending upon the radius of the sphere
8. An air bubble with a radius R and an iron ball with the same radius are present in water. The distance between
the centers of bubble and iron ball is 1 m. Neglect the mass of air in the bubble. The mass of water drop
whose size is equal to the size of bubble is 1.5 kg. The densities of water and iron are 1 gm/cm3 and 8 gm/cm3
respectively. The force between bubble and iron ball is ......... (approximately) (2015)
A) repulsive, equal to 2.2 × 10–9 N
B) attractive, equal to 1.1 × 10–9 N
C) respulsive, equal to 1.1 × 10–9 N
D) attractive, equal to 2.2 × 10–9 N
9. A piece of wood floats in water kept in beaker. If the beaker moves with a vertical acceleration ‘a’, the wood
will be : (2015)
A) remain in the same position relative to the water surface
B) sink deeper in the liquid, if ‘a’ is downward with a < g
C) sink deeper the liquid, if ‘a’ is upward
D) come out, more from the liquid, if ‘a’ is downward with a <g
10. The magnitude of buoyant force depends on which one of the following properties of fluid? (2017)
A) Mass of object B) Size of object C) Density of liquid D) Size of container
11. A force of 16 N is distributed uniformly on one surface of a cube of edge 8 cm. The pressure on this surface
is : (2017)
A) 3500 Pa B) 2500 Pa C) 4500 Pa D) 5500 Pa
12. At what temperature was density of water is maximum. (2017)
A) Below 4oC B) Above 4oC C) 0oC D) 4oC
13. A Density of water is .............. (2017)
A) 1000 kg/m3 B) 1 kg/m3 C) 1000 g/cm2 D) 100 kg/m3
14. According to law of floatation weight of a floating body is: (2017)
A) Equal to the weight of liquid displaced B) Equal to the volume of liquid displaced
C) Is gretaer than the weight of liquid displaced D) Is less the weight of liquid displaced
188
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

2
15. A ball of uniform density of that of water is dropped freely into a pond from a height 10 m above its
3
surface. The maximum depth the ball can travel in water is
A) 21 m B) 10 m C) 20 m D) 30 m
16. A ship rises up as it enters the sea from a river because
A) Sea water is harder than river water B) Density of sea water is lesser than river water
C) Large quantity of sea water pushes ship up D) Density of sea water is greater tthan river water
17. A spring balance measures the weight of an object in air to be 0.1 N. It shows a reading of 0.08 N when the
object is completely immersed in water. If the value of acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2, the volume of the
object is
A) 20 cm3 B) 80 cm3 C) 200 cm3 D) 2 cm3

189
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 08
WAVE MOTION AND SOUND

A wave is a mode of transfer of energy from point to point in the direction of propagation of the wave. The
waves are periodic disturbances transmitted through a medium from a point of origin called the source. The disturbances
from the source are handed over to the particles in the medium. The particles in the medium behave as if they are
connected by some elastic forces. When a particle in the medium is set into vibration, the adjacent particles acquire
a similar kind of vibration.
A wave motion is a form of disturbance which travels through the medium due to the repeated periodic motion of
the particles of the medium about their equilibrium positions, the disturbance being handed over from particle to particle.
A wave is a disturbance which propagate energy from one place to another without transport of matter.
Mechanical and non mechanical waves
A wave may or may not require a medium for its propagation. The waves which do not require a medium for
their propagation are called non-mechanical wave.
Eg. light waves, heat waves, radio waves etc. Non-mechanical waves can travel through vacuum. In fact all
electromagnetic waves are non-mechanical. On the other hand waves which require a medium for the propagation
are called mechanical waves. In the propagation of mechanical waves, elasticity and density of the medium play an
important role. Waves on strings, springs, sound waves etc are familiar examples of mechanical waves.
TYPES OF WAVES
(i) Longitudinal wave
If the vibrations of the particles of the medium conveying a wave are to and fro and parallel to the direction of
propagation of the wave, then the wave is called a longitudinal wave.
For example, when a spring under tension is set up oscillating to and fro at one end, a longitudinal wave travels
along the spring; the coils vibrate back and forth in the direction in which the disturbance travels along the spring.
Sound waves in a gas are longitudinal waves. When a sound wave propagates through a gas, particles in the medium
vibrate to and fro and parallel to the direction of propagation of the wave.

In longitudinal motion of the particles, sound waves consist of a series of compressions followed by rarefactions.
Figure above shows how a vibrating tuning fork sends out a sound wave. When the prong moves out, it
compresses the air particles. This region of higher pressure is called compression. Thus a pulse of compression
moves outwards. Similarly a reverse movement of the prong gives rise to a region of low pressure called rarefaction.
190
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

(ii) Transverse wave

If the vibrations of the particles of the medium conveying a wave are perpendicular to the direction of propagation
of the wave, then the wave is called a transverse wave.

For example, consider a light rope tied at one end. Hold its other end. It is kept under tension by stretching.
Give a sudden flipping motion by a jerk of the hand perpendicular to the length of the rope. A disturbance in the
shape of a pulse can be seen travelling along the rope towards the fixed end. The waves travelling along the rope is
transverse.
Waves can also be classified as one, two and three dimensional waves, according to the number of dimensions
in which they propagate energy. Waves moving along a string or a spring are one dimensional. Ripples on the surface
of water are two dimensional. Sound waves and light waves are three dimensional.
Difference between Transverse and Longitudinal waves
Transverse waves
1 The particles of the medium vibrate perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the wave.
2 The wave travels in the form of crests and troughs.
3 One crest and one trough constitute one wave.
4 These waves can be polarised.
Longitudinal waves
1 Particles in the medium vibrate parallel to the direction of propagation of the wave.
2 The wave travels in the form of condensations and rarefactions.
3 One condensation and one rarefaction constitute one wave.
4 These cannot be polarised.
Important terms connected with wave motion
Amplitude (A)
Amplitude of a wave is the maximum displacement of the wave. In the case of mechanical waves it is the
maximum displacement of the particles of the medium from their equilibrium position
Unit: m
Period (T)
Period of a wave is the time taken by the particles of the medium to execute one complete to and fro motion.
Unit: s
Frequency (v)
Frequency of a wave is the number of vibrations executed by a particle of the medium in one second.
1
 Unit: hertz (Hz)
T
191
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Wave length (  )
Wave length of a wave is the distance travelled by the wave during one complete vibration of a particle in the
medium.
It is also defined as the least distance between two consecutive particles which are in the same phase of
vibration.



So the wavelength is the distance between two successive crests or troughs of the wave.
Velocity (v)
Velocity of a wave is the distance travelled by the wave in one second.
Unit: ms–1
Relation between frequency (v) and period (T)
By definition
Time for completing v vibrations = 1 sec
1
Time for completing one vibration = sec

1 1
i.e., T  or   or vT = 1 -------------(1)
 T
Relation between velocity, frequency and wavelength of the wave
Suppose  = frequency of a wave,
T = time period of the wave,
 = wavelength of the wave,
v = velocity of the wave.
distance s
By definition, velocity   ---------(2)
time t
In one complete vibration of the particle, distance travelled, s =  and time taken, t  T , From (2),
 1
v  
T T
Using (1), we get v   ------------(3)
Hence velocity of wave is the product of frequency and wavelength of the wave. This relation holds for transverse
as well as longitudinal waves.
Example 1 : The frequency of a wave is 200 Hz and its wavelength is 60 m. Find its velocity.
Solution : v = 200 Hz,   60 m
v    200  60  12000 m/s

192
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Example 2 : The distance between a compression and the next rarefaction of sound wave is 12.5 cm. If the sound
waves can travel 1050 m in 3 seconds. Then find the number of waves produced in 1 second.

Solution : The distance between a compression and the next rare faction is .
2

  12.5 or   25 cm  0.25 m
2
1050
Velocity   350 m/s
3
v 350
Number of waves produced in 1 s  frequency      1400 Hz
 0.25
Example 3 : A wave of time period 10 ms travels with a velocity of 1.5 ms–1. If the time period of another wave is
6 ms, find its velocity and also find the ratio of their velocities. (Assume the wavelength of the two waves is same.)
1
Solution : 1   100 Hz , v1 = 1.5 ms–1
10  103
v1 1.5
1    0.015 m
1 100
Since the wavelength is the same for the two waves.
1
2   166.67
6  103
v2   2   166.67  0.015  2.5 m/s
Ratio of the velocities
v1 1.5 3
  v1 : v 2  3 : 5
v 2 2.5 5
Example 4 : For the range of frequencies of sound 11 kHz to 11 MHz, find the range of wavelength of sound at
0oC, given the velocity of sound in air as 330 ms–1 at 0oC.
Solution : 1  11 kHz ,  2  11 MHz

330
1   0.03 m
11000
330
2   3  105 m
1110 6

 The Range is 3 × 10–2 m to 3 × 10–5 m

Example 5 : A hospital uses an ultrasonic scanner to locate tumours in a tissue. What is the wavelength of sound in
a tissue in which the speed of sound is 1.7 km s–1 ? The operating frequency of the scanner is 4.2 MHz.
Solution : Velocity = 1.7 km/s = 1700 m/s
Frequency v = 4.2 MHz = 4.2 × 106 Hz
193
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

v  
v 1700
   0.000405 m  0.405 mm
 4.2  106
SOUND WAVES
Hearing is one of the primary sensations. The physical cause that produces the sensation of hearing is the
vibration of the source. These vibrations are carried by air, as a medium. Our ear is sensitive only to those vibrations
whose frequency lies between 20 hertz to 20,000 hertz. This frequency range is called audible range.
Any vibration whose frequency is greater than 20,000 hertz is called ultrasonic vibration. It cannot be heard by
human ear. The sound waves which have frequencies less than the audible range are called infrasonic waves.
The velocity of sound in air at room temperature and normal pressure is roughly 350 ms-1. An object moving with a
speed greater than the speed of sound is said to move with a supersonic speed.
SPEED OF WAVE MOTION
Wave motion, as we know, can be transverse as well as longitudinal. It is found that generally transverse and
longitudinal waves travel with different speeds in the same medium.
(a) Speed of transverse wave motion
(i) The velocity of propagation of a transverse wave on a stretched string is given by
v  T m ----------------(4)
where T is tension in the string and m is linear density of the string i.e. mass per unit length of the string.
(ii) The velocity of transverse waves in a solid is given by v    --------------(5)
where  is the modulus of rigidity and  is the density of the material of the solid.
(b) Speed of Longitudinal wave Motion
(i) In a solid medium,
When the solid is in the form of a long bar, the speed of longitudinal waves through the bar is given by
v  Y  --------------(6)
where Y is the young’s modulus of the material of the bar.
(ii) In liquids, the velocity of longitudinal waves is given by v  K  -------------(7)
where K is the bulk modulus and  is the density of the liquid.

P
(iii) In gases, the velocity of longitudinal waves is given by v  -------------(8)

where  is the ratio of specific heats, P the pressure and  the density of the gas.
FACTORS AFFECTING VELOCITY OF SOUND
The velocity of sound in any gaseous medium is affected by a large number of factors like density, pressure,
temperature and humidity.

P
(a) Effect of density. The velocity of sound in a gaseous medium is given by v  

194
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

The velocity of sound in a gas is inversely proportional to the square root of density of the gas. For example,
density of oxygen is 16 times the density of hydrogen.

vH O
 4 or v H  4v O
vO H
Therefore, the velocity of sound in hydrogen is four times the velocity of sound in oxygen.

P
(b) Effect of Pressure. The formula for velocity of sound in a gas is v  
According to the standard gas equation for one gm molecule of a gas, PV = RT, where the letters have their
usual meanings. P = RT/V

RT RT
 v 
 V M
where  × V = M, the molecular weight of the gas. For a given gas, R,  and M are constants. If the
temperature T of the gas is kept constant, then v is constant.
Hence velocity of sound is independent of the pressure of the gas, provided temperature remains constant.

P
(c) Effect of Temperature. The formula for velocity of sound in a gas is v  
According to standard gas equation,

RT RT
PV = RT or P  RT  v 
V  V M ------------(9)

 v  T ---------------------(10)
Hence velocity of sound in a gas is directly proportional to the square root of its absolute temperature.
(d) Effect of Humidity. The presence of water vapours in air changes its density. That is why the velocity of sound
changes with humidity of air. ;
Suppose,  m = density of moist air,,
d = density of dry air,,

vm = velocity of sound in moist air,,

v d = velocity of sound in dry air..
Assuming that effect of humidity on  is negligible

P P
we get from (8), vm   and vd  
m d

vm d
Dividing, we get 
vd m ------(11)

195
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Dry air is heavier than water vapours. The presence of water vapours, therefore, reduces the density of air.
i.e.  m  d
therefore, from (11), vm>:vd
Hence velocity of sound in moist air is greater than the velocity of sound in dry air. That is why sound travels
faster on a rainy day than on a dry day.
Example 6 : A sound wave has frequency 1000 Hz and wavelength 33 cm. How long will it take to move through
1 km?
Solution : Given that frequency,   1000 Hz .
Wavelength   33 cm  0.33 m
Distance d = 1 km = 1000 m
Velocity of wave is given by
v  h  1000  0.33ms 1  330 ms 1

Distance 1000
Time taken    3.03 s
Velocity 330
Example 7 : If 500 sound waves are produced in one minute, then find the time taken by a vibrating particles to
move from its mean position to the immediate rarefaction.
Solution : Frequency   500
1
Period T 
500
T
The time taken by the vibrating particles to move from its mean position to the immediate rarefaction is
2
T 1 1
 the time t    s  0.001 s
2 2  500 1000
Example 8 : Calculate the velocity of sound through iron, given that the modulus of elasticity for iron = 2 × 1011 Pa
and density of iron = 8 × 1013 kgm–3.
Solution : Velocity of sound through a solid.

Y
v . Y - Youngs modulus;  - Density..


2  1011
 v  25  106 m/s  5 103 m/s
8  103

Example 9 : At what temperature the velocity of sound in air will be double that of air at 0oC. (Given v0 = 332 ms–1)

RT
Solution : We have v 
M

196
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

v2 T2 v2 T 2v 0 T2 T2
  ;  2 ;  ; 4  T2  1092 K  819o C
v T v1 T1 v0 T0 v0 273 273
Example 10 : Displacement-distance graph of particles vibrating in a gas under the influence of a tuning fork of
frequency 512 Hz is given as follows. Find the velocity of sound in the gas?

A B
4
Displacement (mm)

0 C D
20 40 60 80 100 120
–2
Distance (cm)
–4
P

Solution : Points A and B represent the consecutive compression. Distance between them is called wavelength
 .
So,   100  20   80 cm  0.8 m

We know that v    512  0.8  409.6 ms 1

Example 11 : A bat emits ultrasonic sound of frequency 100 k Hz in air. If this sound meets a water surface, what
is the wavelength of (a) the reflected sound (b) the transmitted sound ? Speed of sound in air = 340 ms–1 and in
water = 1486ms–1.
Solution : v = 100 × 103 Hz
1) For the reflected sound, the wave is in air.
va 340
 va  340 m/s   a    0.0034 m  3.4 mm
 100  103
2) For the transmitted sound
vT  1486 m/s

vT 1486
T    0.01486 m  1.486 cm
 100  103
Example 12 : A steel wire 70 cm long has a mass of 7 g. If the wire is under a tension of 100 N, what is the speed
of transverse waves in the wire ?
Solution : T = 100 N

197
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

7g 7  103 kg
Linear density m    0.01 kg/m
70 cm 0.7 m

T 100
v   100 m/s
m 0.01
Example 13 : A stone is dropped into a well in which water is 78.4 m deep. After how long will the sound of splash
be heard at the top ? Take velocity of sound in air = 332 ms–l.
Solution : Depth of the well = 78.4 m.
Total time = T = t1 + t2
t1 = The time taken by the stone to reach the bottom of the well.
t2 = The time taken by sound to reach from the bottom of the well.

1 2 2h 2h 2  78.4
h gt1  t12  , t1   4s
2 g g 9.8

h 78.4
h  u a  t 2  t 2  u  332  0.2365
a

Total time T  t1  t 2  4  0.236  4.236 s

SUPERPOSITION PRINCIPLE
The principle of superposition enables us to find the resultant of any number of waves. According to this
principle, the displacement at any time due to any number of waves meeting simultaneously at a point in a medium,
is the vector sum of the individual displacements due to each one of the waves at that point at the same time.

If y1 , y 2 , y 3 ..... are the displacements at a particular time at a particular position, due to individual waves, then the

resultant displacement y at the same time at the given position would be y  y1  y 2  y 3  ..... (12)

198
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Y R1
y
A

B
O X
t

Y'

For example, in Fig. above, crest of one wave A falls on crest of the other wave B, and trough falls on trough.
Therefore, the amplitude of the resultant wave R1 is the sum of the amplitudes of the two waves, A and B.
Again, in Fig. below, crest of one wave A falls on the trough of the other wave B and trough falls on crest.
Therefore, the amplitude of the resultant wave R2 is the difference in the amplitudes of the two waves A and B.

Y
y A
R2

O X
t
B

Y'

Note that this principle of superposition applies equally well to electromagnetic waves.
BEATS
When two sound waves of slightly different frequencies, travelling in a medium along the same direction,
superimpose on each other, the intensity of the resultant sound at a particular position rises and falls regularly with
time. This phenomenon of regular variation in the intensity of sound with time at a particular position, when two
sound waves of nearly equal frequencies superimpose on each other is called beats.
The time interval between two successive beats (i.e. two successive maxima or minima of sound) is called beat
period. The number of beats produced per second is called beat frequency.
Number of beats/sec. = difference in frequencies of two sources of sound
Number of beats/sec. n = n1 – n2
where n1 and n2 are two slightly different frequencies
v v v v 1 1 
n1  , n2  , then n   v  
1 2 1  2  1  2 
Example 14 : A tuning fork P produces 5 beats/sec with another tuning fork Q whose frequency is known
199
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

to be 284 hertz. Deduce the frequency of fork P ?

Solution : The number of heats prodcued/sec or beat frequency is the differences in frequency of the feching forks.
 The frequency of the fork 2 is
n  284  5
i.e., 289 Hz or 279 Hz
Standing waves in a string
Fixed at both ends

A stretched string fixed between two points can be made to vibrate transversely and a transverse progressive
wave travels along the string starting from one end. At the other end the wave is reflected back and the incident and
the reflected identical waves superpose to form stationary waves.
Node and Anti-node
A node is a point along a standing wave where the wave has minimum (zero) amplitude.
The opposite of a node is an anti-node, a point where the amplitude of the standing wave is at maximum. These
occur midway between the nodes.
There are always two nodes at the two ends of the string.
If L be the length of the string, then its simplest mode of vibration, the string vibrates as a whole in one segment.

For this normal mode, the length of the string L  and v, be the frequency of vibration, then
2
v v
1   --------(13)
 2L

T 1 T
But for the transverse waves in a string v   1  --------(14)
m 2L m
Reflection of Sound
Sound gets reflected at the surface of a solid and liquid in the same way as light does. It follows the laws of
reflection. The laws of reflection are as follows.
1. The angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflection.
2. The incident wave, reflected wave and normal at the point of incidence, they all lie in the same plane.
Echo : The sound that comes to our ear after reflection is called echo of sound.
Eg : Sound we hear after a clap when it is reflected from a cliff.
Sound heard after shouting in a big hall.
The sensation of sound remains in human brain for about 0.1 s. This is called persistance of hearing. It mean for
the echo to be audible the time intervel between the original sound and echo must be at least 0.1 s.
As we know the speed of sound in air is 344 m/s. The distance travelled by sound in 0.1 s will be 34.4 m. It
means to hear the echo properly, the minimum distance of the reflecting surface should be half of this distance

200
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

34.4
  17.2 m
2
Reverberation
When echo is heard multiple times due to repeated and multiple reflection of sound from different reflecting
surfaces. It causes persistence of sound. This is called reverberation.
Example 15 : A boy blows a whistle and its echo from a distant wall is heard after 1.8 seconds. How far is the wall
from him? (Velocity of sound in air at room temperature is 340 ms–1)
Solution : If d be the distance of the wall from the boy, then sound travels a distance d to the wall and back to the
boy.
So total distance travelled by sound is 2d.
Time taken by sound to go to the wall (reflection of sound) and back.

Dis tan ce
t
Velocity

2d
t
v

2d 612
1.8  , 2d = 340 × 1.8 = 612 m  d  306 m
340 2
Wave Front
The imaginary surface drawn at any instant in a medium such that the phases of oscillation of all the particles are
the same is called the wave front.
OR
Locus of all the particles of the medium oscillating in the same phase is called the wave front.
The wave front of a wave is always perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the wave. Hence the line
drawn perpendicular to the wave front, represents the direction of propagation of wave. This is called ray.
There are three types of wave fronts:
(a) Plane wave front
(b) Spherical wave front
(c) Cylindrical wave front
(a) Plane wave front :
If the waves are propagating in the medium in only one direction, the particles of medium in the wave front
drawn at any instant oscillate in the same phase. In this state wave front is plane and the rays are parallel to each
other.

201
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(b) Spherical Wave front :

The waves produced from a point source propagate in all the directions. Hence, the particles of medium on a
spherical surface are in the same phase. In this position the wave front will be spherical and the rays are radial lines.

(c) Cylindrical wave front :

If the source is in the form of a slit, then the particles of medium of the cylindrical surface drawn, taking source
as the axis, oscillate in the same phase. In this case, the wave front is cylindrical.

DOPPLER EFFECT IN SOUND

The phenomenon of the apparent change in the frequency of sound produced by a source as heard by a listener
whenever there is relative motion between the source and the listener is called Doppler effect.
+ve
v
S L
vS vL
Note:
Velocities in the direction in which the sound travels in order to reach the listener are taken positive; while those
in the opposite direction are taken negative. Apparent frequency of sound as heard by the listener is given by

202
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Relative velocity of sound with respect to the listener v

  
Apparent wavelength 

 v  vL 
i.e.,      ---------(15)
 v  vs 
vs - velocity of source.
vL - velocity of listener
v - velocity of sound.
 - apparant frequency

203
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

WAVE MOTION AND SOUND

LEVEL I [HOMEWORK]
1. The longitudinal waves can propagate only in
A) Solids B) Liquids C) Gases D) All the above
2. The linear distance between the compression and the adjacent rarefaction is 0.8 m. The wavelength of the
longitudinal wave is:
A) 0.8 m B) 1.6 m C) 0.4 m D) 3.2 m
3. Which of the following does not require medium to propagate?
A) Radio-waves B) Water-waves C) Sound-waves D) Waves in string
4. In a transverse mechanical wave, the oscillations are
A) Perpendicular to direction of propagation of the wave
B) In the same direction as that of the propagation of wave
C) In all directions
D) Circular
5. The transverse mechanical waves can propagate only in
A) Liquids B) Gases C) Solids D) Vacuum
6. A transverse wave consists of
A) crests and troughs in the medium B) compression and rarefaction in the medium
C) Both (A) and (B) D) Neither (A) nor (B)
7. Which is true for a wave? (here n = frequency, T = time period)

n
A) nT = 1 B) 2 C) n = T D) nT = 2
T
8. Waves on water surfaces are:
A) longitudinal B) transverse
C) combination of longitudinal and transverse D) none of these
9. Time period of a sound wave having the wavelength 0.2 m and frequency 10 Hz will be:
A) 2 s B) 0.2 s C) 0.1 s D) 0.02 s
10. SI unit of frequency is ........
A) Metre B) Second C) Hertz D) ms–1
11. When a wave travels from one medium to another, which quantity does not change?
A) Frequency B) Wavelength C) Velocity D) Amplitude

204
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

12. In the following table, match the column B according to column A.

Column A Column B
(i) Pitch (a) waveform
(ii) Quality (b) frequency
(iii) Loudness (c) amplitude
A) (i) - (b), (ii) - a, (iii) - c B) (i) - (a), (ii) - b, (iii) - c
C) (i) - c, (ii) - b, (iii) - (a) D) (i) - b, (ii) - c, (iii) - a
13. The frequency of a wave is 5 Hz. It refers to (types of waves)
A) Ultrasonics B) Microwaves C) Infrasonic D) Radiowaves
14. The distance between two consecutive crests or two consecutive troughs is called .......
A) Velocity B) Wavelength C) Frequency D) Amplitude
15. The distance between two consecutive compressions is 1.4 m. The wavelength of the wave is
A) 2.8 m B) 1.4 m C) 0.7 m D) 4.2 m
16. A broadcasting station transmits waves of frequency 71 × 104 Hz with a speed of 3 × 108 m/s. The wavelength
of the wave is
A) 418.8 m B) 324.6 m C) 208.4 m D) 422.5 m
17. Velocity of sound is minimum in among the following is
A) Nitrogen B) Hydrogen C) Air D) Carbondioxide
18. Sound waves in air are ........
A) Radio waves B) Electromagnetic waves C) Longitudinal waves D) Transverse waves
19. Which of the following sound waves cannot be heard by human?
A) 21 Hz B) 500 Hz C) 15 Hz C) 1500 Hz
20. Sound energy is basically
A) Mechanical Energy B) Electromagnetic Energy C) Potential Energy D) Electrical Energy
21. The speed of sound waves in a medium is
A) directly proportional to its frequency B) inversely proportional to its frequency
C) directly proportional to square of its frequency D) independent of frequency
22. In which of the following media will sound travel the fastest.
A) solid B) both solid and liquid C) liquid D) gas
23. The minimum distance between the source and the reflector so that the echo is heard is approximately equal to
........... m
A) 10 B) 13 C) 17 D) 20
24. Echo is produced due to
A) Reflection of sound B) Refraction of sound
C) Resonance D) Change in temperature of the medium

205
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

LEVEL II
1. Which of the following is not the transverse wave?
A) X-rays B)  -rays C) Visible light wave D) Sound wave in a gas
2. If frequency of vibration of a string are to be increased by a factor of two, then tension in the string must be
made
A) Half B) Four times C) Twice D) Eight times
3. If the wavelength of a wave is decreased by 20% then its frequency will become
A) 25% more B) 25% less C) 20% more D) 20% less
4. The distance between two consecutive crests in a wave train produced in a string is 5 cm. If two complete
waves pass through any point per second, the velocity of wave is
A) 15 cm/sec B) 10 cm/sec C) 5 cm/sec D) 2.5 cm/sec
5. The frequency of a sound wave is n and its velocity is v. If the frequency is increased to 4n, the velocity of wave
will be

v
A) 2v B) v C) 4v D)
4
6. Maximum value of the wavelength of ultrasonic waves is
A) 1.85 cm B) 20 cm C) 33 cm D) 1.65 cm
7. The temperature at which the speed of sound in air becomes double of its value at 27oC is
A) 54oC B) 327oC C) 927oC D) –123oC

8. When the temperature of an ideal gas is increased by 600 K, the velocity of sound in the gas becomes 3
times the initial velocity in it. The initial temperature of the gas is
A) –73 oC B) 27 oC C) 127 oC D) 327 oC
9. A string is stretched by a weight of 10 kg. (Take g = 10 ms–2). The mass of one metre of string is 10g. The
velocity of transverse wave in the string is
A) 10 km s–1 B) 1 km s–1 C) 100 ms–1 D) 10 ms–1
10. Two tuning forks when sounded together produce 4 beats/sec. The frequency of one fork is 256 Hz. The
number of beats heard increases when the fork of frequency 256 Hz is loaded with wax. The frequency of the
other fork is
A) 260 Hz B) 252 Hz C) 520 Hz D) 504 Hz
11. In a stationary wave, the two consecutive nodes are separated by
   2
A) B) C) D)
4 3 2 3
12. If velocity of sound in air is 300 m/s, then the distance between the two successive nodes of a stationary wave
of frequency 1000 Hz is
A) 10 cm B) 20 cm C) 15 cm D) 30 cm

206
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

13. Two waves of wave lengths 50 cm and 51 cm produce 12 beats per second. The velocity of sound is
A) 340 m/s B) 331 m/s C) 306 m/s D) 360 m/s
14. Two tuning forks produce 2 beats in the time interval of 0.4 sec so that beat frequency is
A) 5 Hz B) 8 Hz C) 2 Hz D) 10 Hz
15. Maximum beat frequency which can be heard by a human being is
A) 10 B) 4 C) 20 D) 6
16. Two sound waves of wavelengths 5 m and 6 m formed 30 beats in 3 sec. The velocity of sound is
A) 300 ms–1 B) 310 ms–1 C) 320 ms–1 D) 330 ms–1
17. The tension in a string is increased by 69%. If its frequency of vibration is to remain unchanged, its length must
be increased by
A) 31% B) 62% C) 30% D) 20%
18. A stone is dropped from the top of a tower 500 m high into a pond of water at the base of the tower. When is
the splash heard at the top? (Given g = 10 ms–2 and speed of sound = 340 ms–1)
A) 10 s B) 11.47 s C) 1.10 s D) 20 s
19. Doppler shift in frequency does not depend upon
A) Frequency of the wave produced B) Distance between source and listener/observer
C) Velocity of the source D) Velocity of the listener/observer
20. An observer moving away from a stationary source such that the pitch is halved. If velocity of sound is denoted
by v, velocity of observer will be
v v
A) 2v B) v C) D)
2 4
21. A source of sound of frequency 450 cycle/sec is moving towards a stationary observer with 34 m/s speed. If
the speed of sound is 340 m/s then the apparent frequency will be
A) 410 cps B) 550 cps C) 500 cps D) 450 cps

LEVEL III

More than one correct answer type.

1. The speed of sound in a gas is not affected by the change in
A) Wavelength of wave B) Amplitude of wave
C) Pressure D) Temperature
2. Sound can travel through .....................

A) Solid B) Liquid C) Gas D) Vacuum

3. Choose the correct statement.
A) The time taken for one complete oscillation is called the time period of the sound wave.
B) The amplitude of sound wave is the height of the crest or tough.
C) With high frequency, sound has high pitch.
D) When frequency is low, sound has low pitch.
207
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

4. Light can travel through ...............

A) Solid B) Liquid C) Gas D) Vacuum
5. Choose the correct unit.
A) The S.I. unit of frequency is Hertz. B) The S.I. unit of wavelength is metre.
C) The S.I. unit of time is hour. D) The S.I. unit of time is second.
Passage Comprehension.
Passage I
The time taken to complete one vibration is called time-period, measured in second and the number of complete
waves produced in one second is called frequency of the wave, measured in hertz and they are related as
1
f , where f is frequency of the wave and T is time period of the wave. The distance travelled by a wave in
T

one second is called velocity of the wave, measured in m/s and it is related to time period as v  , where v
T
is velocity of wave,  is the wavelength of wave in cm and T is time-period of the wave.
6. A source is producing 1500 sound waves in 3 seconds. The distance between compression and an adjacent
rarefaction is 34 cm. What will be the frequency of the wave?
A) 200 Hz B) 300 Hz C) 400 Hz D) 500 Hz
7. From the above question, find the wavelength of the wave?
A) 25 cm B) 56 cm C) 68 cm D) 82 cm
8. From the above question, find the velocity of the wave?
A) 250 m/s B) 340 m/s C) 330 m/s D) 300 m/s
Passage II
We can hear the original sound and the reflected sound (echo) separately only if there is a time interval of at
1
least th of a second between them. By knowing the minimum time interval required for an echo to be heard
10
and the speed of sound in air, the minimum distance from a sound reflecting surface which is necessary to hear
an echo can be calculated.
9. A man claps his hand near a mountain and hears the echo after 4 seconds. If the speed of sound under these
conditions be 330 m/s, what is the distance of mountain from the man?
A) 660 m B) 440 m C) 330 m D) 550 m
10. The speed of sound in water is 1500 m/s. How far away from an under-sea rock should a deep sea diver be so
that he can hear his own echo?
A) 60 m B) 44 m C) 57 m D) 75 m
11. An echo is simply a ...........
A) Refracting sound B) Reflecting sound C) Reverberation D) all of the above

208
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

Matrix match type.

12. Choose the correct S.I. unit.
Column I Column II
A) Amplitude p) Second
B) Time period q) Hertz
C) Frequency r) Metre
D) Wavelength s) Metre

A) A - p, B - q, C - r, D - s B) A - s, B - r, C - q, D - p
C) A - q, B - p, C - r, D - s D) A - s, B - p, C - q, D - r
13. Choose the correct symbol.
Column I Column II
A) Compression p) 
B) Rarefaction q) C
C) Frequency r) 
D) Wavelength s) R

A) A - p, B - q, C - r, D - s B) A - q, B - s, C - p, D - r
C) A - q, B - p, C - r, D - s D) A - s, B - p, C - q, D - r
14. Choose the correct code.
Column I Column II
A) Compression p) Soft sound
B) Rarefaction q) Loud sound
C) Big amplitude r) Low pressure
D) Small amplitude s) High pressure

A) A - p, B - q, C - r, D - s B) A - s, B - r, C - q, D - p
C) A - q, B - p, C - r, D - s D) A - s, B - p, C - q, D - r
15. Match the following columns:
Column I Column II
A) In a progressive wave p) Vibration of particles are along the
direction of wave propagation.
B) In a transverse wave q) Amplitude of vibration does not vary with
time.
C) In a stationary wave r) Vibrations of particles are perpendicular
to the direction of wave propagation.
D) In a longitudinal wave s) Amplitude of vibration varies with
position.

A) A - q, B - r, C - p, D - s B) A - r, B - q, C - s, D - p
C) A - q, B - r, C - s, D - p D) A - q, B - s, C - r, D - p

209
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

16. Match the following columns.

Column I Column II
A) Change in apparent frequency due to relative motion p) Beats
between source and listener is
B) Intensity of sound varies with time in q) Transverse
C) Sound waves in air are r) Doppler effect
D) Light wave are s) Longitudinal

A) A - r, B - p, C - q, D - s B) A - p, B - r, C - q, D - s

C) A - r, B - s, C - p, D - q D) A - r, B - p, C - s, D - q

Integer answer type.

17. A sound source sends waves of 400 Hz. It produces waves of wavelength 2.5m. What is the velocity of sound
waves in km h–1?

18. The time period of a vibrating body is 0.5 s. What is the frequency of waves that it emits?

19. A bat can hear sound of frequencies up to 115 kHz. Determine the minimum wave length (in mm) of sound
which it can hear. Speed of sound in air to be 345 m/s.

20. A wave pulse of frequency 160 Hz, on a string moves a distance 8 m in 0.05s. Calculate the wavelength of
wave on string.

21. If velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s and frequency is 4250 Hz. What will be the wavelength in cm?
Reasoning Type.

Each question contains Statement I and Statement II. Of these Statements, mark correct choice if
A) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
B) Statements I and II are true and Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
22. Statement I : Wave on a string are always transverse in nature
Statement II : The velocity of a transverse wave propagating along a string is independent of the frequency
of the propagating wave
23. Statement I : Beat frequency between two tuning forks A and B is 4 Hz. Frequency of A is greater than the
frequency of B. When one of them is loaded with wax, beat frequency may increase or
decrease.
Statement II : When a tuning fork is loaded with wax its frequency decreases.

210
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

24. Statement I : The frequency of ultrasonic waves is greater than 20,000 Hz.
Statement II : The range of audible sound is 20 to 20,000 Hz.
25. Statement I : To hear beats, the difference in the frequencies of the two sources should be less than ten.
Statement II : More the number of beats, more difficult it to hear them.
26. Statement I : When a simple pendulum is made to oscillate on the surface of the moon, its time period
increases.
Statement II : The moon is much smaller as compared to the earth.
27. Statement I : Compression and rarefaction involve changes in density and pressure.
Statement II : When particles are compressed, density of medium increases and when they are rarefied,
density of medium decreases.
28. Statement I : The velocity of sound in the air increases due to presence of moisture in it.
Statement II : The presence of moisture in air lowers the density of air.
NTSE PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS
1. If the velocities of sound in steel, water and vacuum are v1, v2 and v3 respectively the correct relation is:
(2006)
A) v1 < v2 < v3 B) v1 < (v2 + v3) C) v1 = v2 = v3 D) v1 > v2; v3 = 0
2. The speeds of sound in air and sea-water are given to be 340 m/s and 1440 m/s respectively. A ship sends a
strong signal straight down and detects its echo after 1.5 secs. The depth of sea at that point is : (2013)
A) 2.16 kms B) 1.08 kms C) 0.51 kms D) 0.255 kms
3. Voice of which of the following is likely to have maximum frequency? (2013)
A) man B) cow C) bird D) Dog
4. For the wave shapes shown in figures the wave of maximum frequency will be : (2007)

211
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. Velocity of sound is maximum in : (2013)

A) Water B) Oil C) Air D) Iron
6. Four pendulums P, Q, R and S are suspended from same elastic supports as shown in figure. Out of these P
and R are of the same length. Q is smaller than P and S is longest. If the pendulum P is displaced to give small
vibration. (2014)

A) amplitude of vibration for S is maximum B) amplitude of vibration for R is maximum

C) amplitude of vibration for Q is maximum D) amplitude of vibration for all for same
7. Sound with frequency more than 20 KHz is known as (2014)
A) Audible Sound B) Ultra sonic C) Inaudible sound D) None of these
8. The frequency of a source of sound is 50 Hz. How many times does it vibrate in one minute? (2015)
A) 50 B) 300 C) 3000 D) 30000
9. In the phenomenon of propagation of sound in air: (2014)
A) Temperature remains constant B) Heat remains constant
C) Pressure remains constant D) Both (A) and (B)
10. Note the relationship between the first two words and suggest the suitable word for the fourth place.
Loudness : Amplitude, Quality : (2014)
A) Frequency B) Wave length C) Intensity D) Wave form
11. The ratio of velocity of sound in hydrogen to the velocity of sound in oxygen is : (at constant temperature)
(2014)
A) 4 : 1 B) 16 : 1 C) 2 : 1 D) 8 : 1
12. A submarine sends a sonar signal to locate a body and receives the echo after 5 s. If the velocity of the sound
is 340 m/s. What is the distance of the body? (2014)
A) 0.85 km B) 1.7 km C) 0.425 D) 4.25 km
13. ........... identifies quality of sound in human ear. (2015)
A) Nerve impulse B) Pinna C) Cochlea D) Ear drum
14. Which branch of science is associated with the use of X-ray and gamma rays for the diagnosis and treatment?
(2015)
A) urology B) radiology C) histology D) pathology
15. A simple pendulum perform 18 oscillation per second the mechanical wave produced by it be: (2015)
A) sound wave B) ultrasonic wave C) Infrasonic wave D) none of these
16. A stone is dropped into a well 44.1 m deep. The sound of splash is heard 0.13 seconds after the stone hits the
water. What should be the velocity of sound in air? (2015)
A) 319 m/s B) 339 m/s 359 m/s D) 369 m/s
212
 Integrated Programme(Class IX) - Physics

17. A person sees a jet plane flying from east to west. When the plane is just above his head, the sound of plane
appears to reach him at 60o with horizontal. If the velocity of sound is v, then velocity of jet plane is (2015)
v v
A) 2 v B) v C) D)
2 2
18. In air the speed of sound is 340 m/s. This means that in one second: (2015)
A) Sound source moves 340 m B) Listener moves 340 m
C) Air disturbance moves 340 m D) Air moves 340 m
19. Which of the following is carried by waves from one place to another? (2015)
A) mass B) velocity C) wavelength D) energy
20. The vibrations are amplified several times in the middle ear to the bones known as: (2015)
A) Anvil B) Stirrup B) Hammer D) All of the above
21. A musical instrument has tones of frequencies 256 Hz, 502 Hz, 1020 Hz and 1280 Hz. The frequencies of the
fundamental and its harmonic are given by: (2015)
A) 256 Hz and 502 Hz respectively B) 256 Hz and 1020 Hz respectively
C) 502 Hz and 1020 Hz respectively D) 256 Hz and 1280 Hz respectively
22. A sound wave has a wavelength of 3.0 m. The distance from a compression centre to the adjacent rarefaction
centre is: (2015)
A) 0.75 m B) 1.5 m C) 3.0 m D) 6.0 m
23. A sound wave has a frequency of 10 kHz and wavelength 3 mm. How much time will it take to travel 3 metre?
(2018)
A) 0.1 sec B) 1 sec C) 10 sec D) 0.01 sec
24. A car approaches a hill with constant speed. When it is at a distance of 0.96 km., it blows horn whose echo
is heard by the driver 6 second later. If the speed of sound in air in 300 m/s, calculate the speed of the car.
(2017)
A) 100 m/s B) 20 m/s C) 50 m/s D) 70 m/s
25. A person fired a gun standing at a distance of 55 m from a wall. If the speed of sound is 330 m/s, the time for
an echo heard is (2019)
A) 0.33 s B) 0.45 s C) 0.52 s D) 0.61 s
26. A boy in a hill station calls his mum but she could not guess from where her ward calls due to reverberation.
This is because of the distance between the boy and the hill is less than (2019)
A) 34 m B) 27 m C) 17 m D) 5 m
27. The speed of sound in air at NTP is 332 m/s. If air pressure becomes four times the normal then the speed of
sound waves will (2019)
A) double B) quadruple
1
C) remain the same D) become of the original value
4
28. For the wave shown in figure, calcualte the frequency and wave length of the wave if its speed is 320 ms–1.
Y

X
20 cm (2019)
O

A) 80 cm, 4000 Hz B) 8 cm, 4000 Hz C) 80 cm, 400 Hz D) 8 cm, 40 Hz

213
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

29. A man standing between two parallel cliffs fires a gun. If he hears first and second echoes after 1.5 seconds
and 3.5 seconds respectively, then the distance between two cliffs is ...
(Take velocity of sound in air as 340m/s)
A) 1190 m B) 850 m C) 595 m D) 510 m
30. The characteristic of sound that would result in an increase in loudness of the sound is .......
A) Amplitude B) Speed C) Pitch D) Quality
31. Stethoscope of doctors for finding quality, strength and frequency of human heart beat is based on the principle
of
A) SONAR B) Reverberation C) Multiple reflection D) Echo
32. In which of the following media, the speed of sound will be maximum?
A) Glass B) Ethanol C) Air D) Vacuum

214